Home | History | Annotate | Line # | Download | only in bfd
elf32-hppa.c revision 1.13
      1   1.1     skrll /* BFD back-end for HP PA-RISC ELF files.
      2  1.13  christos    Copyright (C) 1990-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
      3   1.1     skrll 
      4   1.1     skrll    Original code by
      5   1.1     skrll 	Center for Software Science
      6   1.1     skrll 	Department of Computer Science
      7   1.1     skrll 	University of Utah
      8   1.1     skrll    Largely rewritten by Alan Modra <alan (at) linuxcare.com.au>
      9   1.1     skrll    Naming cleanup by Carlos O'Donell <carlos (at) systemhalted.org>
     10   1.1     skrll    TLS support written by Randolph Chung <tausq (at) debian.org>
     11   1.7  christos 
     12   1.1     skrll    This file is part of BFD, the Binary File Descriptor library.
     13   1.1     skrll 
     14   1.1     skrll    This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
     15   1.1     skrll    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
     16   1.1     skrll    the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of the License, or
     17   1.1     skrll    (at your option) any later version.
     18   1.1     skrll 
     19   1.1     skrll    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
     20   1.1     skrll    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     21   1.1     skrll    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
     22   1.1     skrll    GNU General Public License for more details.
     23   1.1     skrll 
     24   1.1     skrll    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     25   1.1     skrll    along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
     26   1.1     skrll    Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street - Fifth Floor, Boston,
     27   1.1     skrll    MA 02110-1301, USA.  */
     28   1.1     skrll 
     29   1.1     skrll #include "sysdep.h"
     30   1.1     skrll #include "bfd.h"
     31   1.1     skrll #include "libbfd.h"
     32   1.1     skrll #include "elf-bfd.h"
     33   1.1     skrll #include "elf/hppa.h"
     34   1.1     skrll #include "libhppa.h"
     35   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     36   1.1     skrll #define ARCH_SIZE		32
     37   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-hppa.h"
     38   1.1     skrll #include "elf-hppa.h"
     39   1.1     skrll 
     40   1.1     skrll /* In order to gain some understanding of code in this file without
     41   1.1     skrll    knowing all the intricate details of the linker, note the
     42   1.1     skrll    following:
     43   1.1     skrll 
     44   1.1     skrll    Functions named elf32_hppa_* are called by external routines, other
     45   1.1     skrll    functions are only called locally.  elf32_hppa_* functions appear
     46   1.1     skrll    in this file more or less in the order in which they are called
     47   1.1     skrll    from external routines.  eg. elf32_hppa_check_relocs is called
     48   1.1     skrll    early in the link process, elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections is
     49   1.1     skrll    one of the last functions.  */
     50   1.1     skrll 
     51   1.1     skrll /* We use two hash tables to hold information for linking PA ELF objects.
     52   1.1     skrll 
     53   1.1     skrll    The first is the elf32_hppa_link_hash_table which is derived
     54   1.1     skrll    from the standard ELF linker hash table.  We use this as a place to
     55   1.1     skrll    attach other hash tables and static information.
     56   1.1     skrll 
     57   1.1     skrll    The second is the stub hash table which is derived from the
     58   1.1     skrll    base BFD hash table.  The stub hash table holds the information
     59   1.1     skrll    necessary to build the linker stubs during a link.
     60   1.1     skrll 
     61   1.1     skrll    There are a number of different stubs generated by the linker.
     62   1.1     skrll 
     63   1.1     skrll    Long branch stub:
     64   1.1     skrll    :		ldil LR'X,%r1
     65   1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X(%sr4,%r1)
     66   1.1     skrll 
     67   1.1     skrll    PIC long branch stub:
     68   1.1     skrll    :		b,l .+8,%r1
     69   1.1     skrll    :		addil LR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 4),%r1
     70   1.1     skrll    :		be,n RR'X - ($PIC_pcrel$0 - 8)(%sr4,%r1)
     71   1.1     skrll 
     72   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     73   1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     74  1.13  christos    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get PLT address
     75  1.13  christos    :		ldo RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r22   ;
     76  1.13  christos    :		ldw 0(%r22),%r21		; get procedure entry point
     77   1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     78  1.13  christos    :		ldw 4(%r22),%r19		; get new dlt value.
     79   1.1     skrll 
     80   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
     81   1.1     skrll    (single sub-space version)
     82  1.13  christos    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get PLT address
     83  1.13  christos    :		ldo RR'ltoff(%r1),%r22
     84  1.13  christos    :		ldw 0(%r22),%r21		; get procedure entry point
     85   1.1     skrll    :		bv %r0(%r21)
     86  1.13  christos    :		ldw 4(%r22),%r19		; get new dlt value.
     87   1.1     skrll 
     88   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from normal object file
     89   1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
     90  1.13  christos    :		addil LR'lt_ptr+ltoff,%dp	; get PLT address
     91  1.13  christos    :		ldo RR'lt_ptr+ltoff(%r1),%r22   ;
     92  1.13  christos    :		ldw 0(%r22),%r21		; get procedure entry point
     93  1.13  christos    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1		; get target sid
     94  1.13  christos    :		ldw 4(%r22),%r19		; get new dlt value.
     95   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
     96   1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
     97   1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
     98   1.1     skrll 
     99   1.1     skrll    Import stub to call shared library routine from shared library
    100   1.1     skrll    (multiple sub-space support)
    101  1.13  christos    :		addil LR'ltoff,%r19		; get PLT address
    102  1.13  christos    :		ldo RR'ltoff(%r1),%r22
    103  1.13  christos    :		ldw 0(%r22),%r21		; get procedure entry point
    104  1.13  christos    :		ldsid (%r21),%r1		; get target sid
    105  1.13  christos    :		ldw 4(%r22),%r19		; get new dlt value.
    106   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    107   1.1     skrll    :		be 0(%sr0,%r21)			; branch to target
    108   1.1     skrll    :		stw %rp,-24(%sp)		; save rp
    109   1.1     skrll 
    110   1.1     skrll    Export stub to return from shared lib routine (multiple sub-space support)
    111   1.1     skrll    One of these is created for each exported procedure in a shared
    112   1.1     skrll    library (and stored in the shared lib).  Shared lib routines are
    113   1.1     skrll    called via the first instruction in the export stub so that we can
    114   1.1     skrll    do an inter-space return.  Not required for single sub-space.
    115   1.1     skrll    :		bl,n X,%rp			; trap the return
    116   1.1     skrll    :		nop
    117   1.1     skrll    :		ldw -24(%sp),%rp		; restore the original rp
    118   1.1     skrll    :		ldsid (%rp),%r1
    119   1.1     skrll    :		mtsp %r1,%sr0
    120   1.1     skrll    :		be,n 0(%sr0,%rp)		; inter-space return.  */
    121   1.1     skrll 
    122   1.1     skrll 
    123   1.1     skrll /* Variable names follow a coding style.
    124   1.1     skrll    Please follow this (Apps Hungarian) style:
    125   1.1     skrll 
    126  1.11  christos    Structure/Variable			Prefix
    127   1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_table			"etab"
    128   1.1     skrll    elf_link_hash_entry			"eh"
    129   1.7  christos 
    130   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_table		"htab"
    131   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry		"hh"
    132   1.1     skrll 
    133   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table			"btab"
    134   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_entry			"bh"
    135   1.7  christos 
    136   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_table containing stubs	"bstab"
    137   1.1     skrll    elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry		"hsh"
    138   1.1     skrll 
    139   1.1     skrll    Always remember to use GNU Coding Style. */
    140   1.7  christos 
    141   1.1     skrll #define PLT_ENTRY_SIZE 8
    142   1.1     skrll #define GOT_ENTRY_SIZE 4
    143  1.13  christos #define LONG_BRANCH_STUB_SIZE 8
    144  1.13  christos #define LONG_BRANCH_SHARED_STUB_SIZE 12
    145  1.13  christos #define IMPORT_STUB_SIZE 20
    146  1.13  christos #define IMPORT_SHARED_STUB_SIZE 32
    147  1.13  christos #define EXPORT_STUB_SIZE 24
    148   1.1     skrll #define ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER "/lib/ld.so.1"
    149   1.1     skrll 
    150   1.1     skrll static const bfd_byte plt_stub[] =
    151   1.1     skrll {
    152  1.13  christos   0x0e, 0x80, 0x10, 0x95,  /* 1: ldw	0(%r20),%r21		*/
    153  1.13  christos   0xea, 0xa0, 0xc0, 0x00,  /*    bv	%r0(%r21)		*/
    154   1.1     skrll   0x0e, 0x88, 0x10, 0x95,  /*    ldw	4(%r20),%r21		*/
    155   1.1     skrll #define PLT_STUB_ENTRY (3*4)
    156   1.1     skrll   0xea, 0x9f, 0x1f, 0xdd,  /*    b,l	1b,%r20			*/
    157   1.1     skrll   0xd6, 0x80, 0x1c, 0x1e,  /*    depi	0,31,2,%r20		*/
    158   1.1     skrll   0x00, 0xc0, 0xff, 0xee,  /* 9: .word	fixup_func		*/
    159   1.1     skrll   0xde, 0xad, 0xbe, 0xef   /*    .word	fixup_ltp		*/
    160   1.1     skrll };
    161   1.1     skrll 
    162   1.1     skrll /* Section name for stubs is the associated section name plus this
    163   1.1     skrll    string.  */
    164   1.1     skrll #define STUB_SUFFIX ".stub"
    165   1.1     skrll 
    166   1.1     skrll /* We don't need to copy certain PC- or GP-relative dynamic relocs
    167   1.1     skrll    into a shared object's dynamic section.  All the relocs of the
    168   1.1     skrll    limited class we are interested in, are absolute.  */
    169   1.1     skrll #ifndef RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
    170   1.1     skrll #define RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS 0
    171   1.1     skrll #define IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC(r_type) 1
    172  1.11  christos #define pc_dynrelocs(hh) 0
    173   1.1     skrll #endif
    174   1.1     skrll 
    175   1.1     skrll /* If ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS is non-zero, the linker will try to avoid
    176   1.1     skrll    copying dynamic variables from a shared lib into an app's dynbss
    177   1.1     skrll    section, and instead use a dynamic relocation to point into the
    178   1.1     skrll    shared lib.  */
    179   1.1     skrll #define ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS 1
    180   1.1     skrll 
    181   1.1     skrll enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    182   1.1     skrll {
    183   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch,
    184   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_long_branch_shared,
    185   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import,
    186   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_import_shared,
    187   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_export,
    188   1.1     skrll   hppa_stub_none
    189   1.1     skrll };
    190   1.1     skrll 
    191   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry
    192   1.1     skrll {
    193   1.1     skrll   /* Base hash table entry structure.  */
    194   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_entry bh_root;
    195   1.1     skrll 
    196   1.1     skrll   /* The stub section.  */
    197   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    198   1.1     skrll 
    199   1.1     skrll   /* Offset within stub_sec of the beginning of this stub.  */
    200   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma stub_offset;
    201   1.1     skrll 
    202   1.1     skrll   /* Given the symbol's value and its section we can determine its final
    203   1.1     skrll      value when building the stubs (so the stub knows where to jump.  */
    204   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma target_value;
    205   1.1     skrll   asection *target_section;
    206   1.1     skrll 
    207   1.1     skrll   enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
    208   1.1     skrll 
    209   1.1     skrll   /* The symbol table entry, if any, that this was derived from.  */
    210   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    211   1.1     skrll 
    212   1.1     skrll   /* Where this stub is being called from, or, in the case of combined
    213   1.1     skrll      stub sections, the first input section in the group.  */
    214   1.1     skrll   asection *id_sec;
    215   1.1     skrll };
    216   1.1     skrll 
    217  1.11  christos enum _tls_type
    218  1.11  christos   {
    219  1.11  christos     GOT_UNKNOWN = 0,
    220  1.11  christos     GOT_NORMAL = 1,
    221  1.11  christos     GOT_TLS_GD = 2,
    222  1.11  christos     GOT_TLS_LDM = 4,
    223  1.11  christos     GOT_TLS_IE = 8
    224  1.11  christos   };
    225  1.11  christos 
    226   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry
    227   1.1     skrll {
    228   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry eh;
    229   1.1     skrll 
    230   1.1     skrll   /* A pointer to the most recently used stub hash entry against this
    231   1.1     skrll      symbol.  */
    232   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_cache;
    233   1.1     skrll 
    234   1.1     skrll   /* Used to count relocations for delayed sizing of relocation
    235   1.1     skrll      sections.  */
    236  1.11  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *dyn_relocs;
    237   1.1     skrll 
    238  1.11  christos   ENUM_BITFIELD (_tls_type) tls_type : 8;
    239   1.1     skrll 
    240   1.1     skrll   /* Set if this symbol is used by a plabel reloc.  */
    241   1.1     skrll   unsigned int plabel:1;
    242   1.1     skrll };
    243   1.1     skrll 
    244   1.1     skrll struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table
    245   1.1     skrll {
    246   1.1     skrll   /* The main hash table.  */
    247   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table etab;
    248   1.1     skrll 
    249   1.1     skrll   /* The stub hash table.  */
    250   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table bstab;
    251   1.1     skrll 
    252   1.1     skrll   /* Linker stub bfd.  */
    253   1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    254   1.1     skrll 
    255   1.1     skrll   /* Linker call-backs.  */
    256   1.1     skrll   asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *);
    257   1.1     skrll   void (*layout_sections_again) (void);
    258   1.1     skrll 
    259   1.1     skrll   /* Array to keep track of which stub sections have been created, and
    260   1.1     skrll      information on stub grouping.  */
    261   1.1     skrll   struct map_stub
    262   1.1     skrll   {
    263   1.1     skrll     /* This is the section to which stubs in the group will be
    264   1.1     skrll        attached.  */
    265   1.1     skrll     asection *link_sec;
    266   1.1     skrll     /* The stub section.  */
    267   1.1     skrll     asection *stub_sec;
    268   1.1     skrll   } *stub_group;
    269   1.1     skrll 
    270   1.1     skrll   /* Assorted information used by elf32_hppa_size_stubs.  */
    271   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
    272   1.7  christos   unsigned int top_index;
    273   1.1     skrll   asection **input_list;
    274   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym **all_local_syms;
    275   1.1     skrll 
    276   1.1     skrll   /* Used during a final link to store the base of the text and data
    277   1.1     skrll      segments so that we can perform SEGREL relocations.  */
    278   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma text_segment_base;
    279   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma data_segment_base;
    280   1.1     skrll 
    281   1.1     skrll   /* Whether we support multiple sub-spaces for shared libs.  */
    282   1.1     skrll   unsigned int multi_subspace:1;
    283   1.1     skrll 
    284   1.1     skrll   /* Flags set when various size branches are detected.  Used to
    285   1.1     skrll      select suitable defaults for the stub group size.  */
    286   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_12bit_branch:1;
    287   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_17bit_branch:1;
    288   1.1     skrll   unsigned int has_22bit_branch:1;
    289   1.1     skrll 
    290   1.1     skrll   /* Set if we need a .plt stub to support lazy dynamic linking.  */
    291   1.1     skrll   unsigned int need_plt_stub:1;
    292   1.1     skrll 
    293   1.3  christos   /* Small local sym cache.  */
    294   1.3  christos   struct sym_cache sym_cache;
    295   1.1     skrll 
    296   1.1     skrll   /* Data for LDM relocations.  */
    297   1.1     skrll   union
    298   1.1     skrll   {
    299   1.1     skrll     bfd_signed_vma refcount;
    300   1.1     skrll     bfd_vma offset;
    301   1.1     skrll   } tls_ldm_got;
    302   1.1     skrll };
    303   1.1     skrll 
    304   1.1     skrll /* Various hash macros and functions.  */
    305   1.1     skrll #define hppa_link_hash_table(p) \
    306   1.3  christos   (elf_hash_table_id ((struct elf_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) \
    307   1.3  christos   == HPPA32_ELF_DATA ? ((struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) ((p)->hash)) : NULL)
    308   1.1     skrll 
    309   1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_hash_entry(ent) \
    310   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *)(ent))
    311   1.1     skrll 
    312   1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_entry(ent) \
    313   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *)(ent))
    314   1.1     skrll 
    315   1.1     skrll #define hppa_stub_hash_lookup(table, string, create, copy) \
    316   1.1     skrll   ((struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *) \
    317   1.1     skrll    bfd_hash_lookup ((table), (string), (create), (copy)))
    318   1.1     skrll 
    319   1.1     skrll #define hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type(abfd) \
    320   1.1     skrll   ((char *)(elf_local_got_offsets (abfd) + (elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr.sh_info * 2)))
    321   1.1     skrll 
    322   1.1     skrll #define hh_name(hh) \
    323   1.1     skrll   (hh ? hh->eh.root.root.string : "<undef>")
    324   1.1     skrll 
    325   1.1     skrll #define eh_name(eh) \
    326   1.1     skrll   (eh ? eh->root.root.string : "<undef>")
    327   1.1     skrll 
    328   1.1     skrll /* Assorted hash table functions.  */
    329   1.1     skrll 
    330   1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    331   1.1     skrll 
    332   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    333   1.1     skrll stub_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    334   1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    335   1.1     skrll 		   const char *string)
    336   1.1     skrll {
    337   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    338   1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    339   1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    340   1.1     skrll     {
    341   1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    342   1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry));
    343   1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    344   1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    345   1.1     skrll     }
    346   1.1     skrll 
    347   1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    348   1.1     skrll   entry = bfd_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    349   1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    350   1.1     skrll     {
    351   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    352   1.1     skrll 
    353   1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    354   1.1     skrll       hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (entry);
    355   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_sec = NULL;
    356   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    357   1.1     skrll       hsh->target_value = 0;
    358   1.1     skrll       hsh->target_section = NULL;
    359   1.1     skrll       hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch;
    360   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh = NULL;
    361   1.1     skrll       hsh->id_sec = NULL;
    362   1.1     skrll     }
    363   1.1     skrll 
    364   1.1     skrll   return entry;
    365   1.1     skrll }
    366   1.1     skrll 
    367   1.1     skrll /* Initialize an entry in the link hash table.  */
    368   1.1     skrll 
    369   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_hash_entry *
    370   1.1     skrll hppa_link_hash_newfunc (struct bfd_hash_entry *entry,
    371   1.1     skrll 			struct bfd_hash_table *table,
    372   1.1     skrll 			const char *string)
    373   1.1     skrll {
    374   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate the structure if it has not already been allocated by a
    375   1.1     skrll      subclass.  */
    376   1.1     skrll   if (entry == NULL)
    377   1.1     skrll     {
    378   1.1     skrll       entry = bfd_hash_allocate (table,
    379   1.1     skrll 				 sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry));
    380   1.1     skrll       if (entry == NULL)
    381   1.1     skrll 	return entry;
    382   1.1     skrll     }
    383   1.1     skrll 
    384   1.1     skrll   /* Call the allocation method of the superclass.  */
    385   1.1     skrll   entry = _bfd_elf_link_hash_newfunc (entry, table, string);
    386   1.1     skrll   if (entry != NULL)
    387   1.1     skrll     {
    388   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
    389   1.1     skrll 
    390   1.1     skrll       /* Initialize the local fields.  */
    391   1.1     skrll       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (entry);
    392   1.1     skrll       hh->hsh_cache = NULL;
    393   1.1     skrll       hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
    394   1.1     skrll       hh->plabel = 0;
    395   1.1     skrll       hh->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
    396   1.1     skrll     }
    397   1.1     skrll 
    398   1.1     skrll   return entry;
    399   1.1     skrll }
    400   1.1     skrll 
    401   1.7  christos /* Free the derived linker hash table.  */
    402   1.7  christos 
    403   1.7  christos static void
    404   1.7  christos elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free (bfd *obfd)
    405   1.7  christos {
    406   1.7  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab
    407   1.7  christos     = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *) obfd->link.hash;
    408   1.7  christos 
    409   1.7  christos   bfd_hash_table_free (&htab->bstab);
    410   1.7  christos   _bfd_elf_link_hash_table_free (obfd);
    411   1.7  christos }
    412   1.7  christos 
    413   1.1     skrll /* Create the derived linker hash table.  The PA ELF port uses the derived
    414   1.1     skrll    hash table to keep information specific to the PA ELF linker (without
    415   1.1     skrll    using static variables).  */
    416   1.1     skrll 
    417   1.1     skrll static struct bfd_link_hash_table *
    418   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create (bfd *abfd)
    419   1.1     skrll {
    420   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    421   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (*htab);
    422   1.1     skrll 
    423   1.7  christos   htab = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
    424   1.1     skrll   if (htab == NULL)
    425   1.1     skrll     return NULL;
    426   1.1     skrll 
    427   1.1     skrll   if (!_bfd_elf_link_hash_table_init (&htab->etab, abfd, hppa_link_hash_newfunc,
    428   1.3  christos 				      sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry),
    429   1.3  christos 				      HPPA32_ELF_DATA))
    430   1.1     skrll     {
    431   1.1     skrll       free (htab);
    432   1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    433   1.1     skrll     }
    434   1.1     skrll 
    435   1.1     skrll   /* Init the stub hash table too.  */
    436   1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_hash_table_init (&htab->bstab, stub_hash_newfunc,
    437   1.1     skrll 			    sizeof (struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry)))
    438   1.7  christos     {
    439   1.7  christos       _bfd_elf_link_hash_table_free (abfd);
    440   1.7  christos       return NULL;
    441   1.7  christos     }
    442   1.7  christos   htab->etab.root.hash_table_free = elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_free;
    443   1.1     skrll 
    444   1.1     skrll   htab->text_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    445   1.1     skrll   htab->data_segment_base = (bfd_vma) -1;
    446   1.1     skrll   return &htab->etab.root;
    447   1.1     skrll }
    448   1.1     skrll 
    449  1.10  christos /* Initialize the linker stubs BFD so that we can use it for linker
    450  1.10  christos    created dynamic sections.  */
    451  1.10  christos 
    452  1.10  christos void
    453  1.10  christos elf32_hppa_init_stub_bfd (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
    454  1.10  christos {
    455  1.10  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    456  1.10  christos 
    457  1.10  christos   elf_elfheader (abfd)->e_ident[EI_CLASS] = ELFCLASS32;
    458  1.10  christos   htab->etab.dynobj = abfd;
    459  1.10  christos }
    460  1.10  christos 
    461   1.1     skrll /* Build a name for an entry in the stub hash table.  */
    462   1.1     skrll 
    463   1.1     skrll static char *
    464   1.1     skrll hppa_stub_name (const asection *input_section,
    465   1.1     skrll 		const asection *sym_sec,
    466   1.1     skrll 		const struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    467   1.1     skrll 		const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
    468   1.1     skrll {
    469   1.1     skrll   char *stub_name;
    470   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type len;
    471   1.1     skrll 
    472   1.1     skrll   if (hh)
    473   1.1     skrll     {
    474   1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + strlen (hh_name (hh)) + 1 + 8 + 1;
    475   1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    476   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    477   1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%s+%x",
    478   1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    479   1.1     skrll 		 hh_name (hh),
    480   1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    481   1.1     skrll     }
    482   1.1     skrll   else
    483   1.1     skrll     {
    484   1.1     skrll       len = 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1 + 8 + 1;
    485   1.1     skrll       stub_name = bfd_malloc (len);
    486   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name != NULL)
    487   1.1     skrll 	sprintf (stub_name, "%08x_%x:%x+%x",
    488   1.1     skrll 		 input_section->id & 0xffffffff,
    489   1.1     skrll 		 sym_sec->id & 0xffffffff,
    490   1.1     skrll 		 (int) ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) & 0xffffffff,
    491   1.1     skrll 		 (int) rela->r_addend & 0xffffffff);
    492   1.1     skrll     }
    493   1.1     skrll   return stub_name;
    494   1.1     skrll }
    495   1.1     skrll 
    496   1.1     skrll /* Look up an entry in the stub hash.  Stub entries are cached because
    497   1.1     skrll    creating the stub name takes a bit of time.  */
    498   1.1     skrll 
    499   1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    500   1.1     skrll hppa_get_stub_entry (const asection *input_section,
    501   1.1     skrll 		     const asection *sym_sec,
    502   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    503   1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    504   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    505   1.1     skrll {
    506   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh_entry;
    507   1.1     skrll   const asection *id_sec;
    508   1.1     skrll 
    509   1.1     skrll   /* If this input section is part of a group of sections sharing one
    510   1.1     skrll      stub section, then use the id of the first section in the group.
    511   1.1     skrll      Stub names need to include a section id, as there may well be
    512   1.1     skrll      more than one stub used to reach say, printf, and we need to
    513   1.1     skrll      distinguish between them.  */
    514   1.1     skrll   id_sec = htab->stub_group[input_section->id].link_sec;
    515  1.12  christos   if (id_sec == NULL)
    516  1.12  christos     return NULL;
    517   1.1     skrll 
    518   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL && hh->hsh_cache != NULL
    519   1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->hh == hh
    520   1.1     skrll       && hh->hsh_cache->id_sec == id_sec)
    521   1.1     skrll     {
    522   1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hh->hsh_cache;
    523   1.1     skrll     }
    524   1.1     skrll   else
    525   1.1     skrll     {
    526   1.1     skrll       char *stub_name;
    527   1.1     skrll 
    528   1.1     skrll       stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, rela);
    529   1.1     skrll       if (stub_name == NULL)
    530   1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
    531   1.1     skrll 
    532   1.1     skrll       hsh_entry = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
    533   1.1     skrll 					  stub_name, FALSE, FALSE);
    534   1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
    535   1.1     skrll 	hh->hsh_cache = hsh_entry;
    536   1.1     skrll 
    537   1.1     skrll       free (stub_name);
    538   1.1     skrll     }
    539   1.1     skrll 
    540   1.1     skrll   return hsh_entry;
    541   1.1     skrll }
    542   1.1     skrll 
    543   1.1     skrll /* Add a new stub entry to the stub hash.  Not all fields of the new
    544   1.1     skrll    stub entry are initialised.  */
    545   1.1     skrll 
    546   1.1     skrll static struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *
    547   1.1     skrll hppa_add_stub (const char *stub_name,
    548   1.1     skrll 	       asection *section,
    549   1.1     skrll 	       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab)
    550   1.1     skrll {
    551   1.1     skrll   asection *link_sec;
    552   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    553   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    554   1.1     skrll 
    555   1.1     skrll   link_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
    556   1.1     skrll   stub_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec;
    557   1.1     skrll   if (stub_sec == NULL)
    558   1.1     skrll     {
    559   1.1     skrll       stub_sec = htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec;
    560   1.1     skrll       if (stub_sec == NULL)
    561   1.1     skrll 	{
    562   1.1     skrll 	  size_t namelen;
    563   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type len;
    564   1.1     skrll 	  char *s_name;
    565   1.1     skrll 
    566   1.1     skrll 	  namelen = strlen (link_sec->name);
    567   1.1     skrll 	  len = namelen + sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX);
    568   1.1     skrll 	  s_name = bfd_alloc (htab->stub_bfd, len);
    569   1.1     skrll 	  if (s_name == NULL)
    570   1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    571   1.1     skrll 
    572   1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name, link_sec->name, namelen);
    573   1.1     skrll 	  memcpy (s_name + namelen, STUB_SUFFIX, sizeof (STUB_SUFFIX));
    574   1.1     skrll 	  stub_sec = (*htab->add_stub_section) (s_name, link_sec);
    575   1.1     skrll 	  if (stub_sec == NULL)
    576   1.1     skrll 	    return NULL;
    577   1.1     skrll 	  htab->stub_group[link_sec->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    578   1.1     skrll 	}
    579   1.1     skrll       htab->stub_group[section->id].stub_sec = stub_sec;
    580   1.1     skrll     }
    581   1.1     skrll 
    582   1.1     skrll   /* Enter this entry into the linker stub hash table.  */
    583   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab, stub_name,
    584   1.1     skrll 				      TRUE, FALSE);
    585   1.1     skrll   if (hsh == NULL)
    586   1.1     skrll     {
    587  1.11  christos       /* xgettext:c-format */
    588  1.12  christos       _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: cannot create stub entry %s"),
    589  1.11  christos 			  section->owner, stub_name);
    590   1.1     skrll       return NULL;
    591   1.1     skrll     }
    592   1.1     skrll 
    593   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec = stub_sec;
    594   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = 0;
    595   1.1     skrll   hsh->id_sec = link_sec;
    596   1.1     skrll   return hsh;
    597   1.1     skrll }
    598   1.1     skrll 
    599   1.1     skrll /* Determine the type of stub needed, if any, for a call.  */
    600   1.1     skrll 
    601   1.1     skrll static enum elf32_hppa_stub_type
    602   1.1     skrll hppa_type_of_stub (asection *input_sec,
    603   1.1     skrll 		   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
    604   1.1     skrll 		   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
    605   1.1     skrll 		   bfd_vma destination,
    606   1.1     skrll 		   struct bfd_link_info *info)
    607   1.1     skrll {
    608   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
    609   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma branch_offset;
    610   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset;
    611   1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type;
    612   1.1     skrll 
    613   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL
    614   1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
    615   1.1     skrll       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
    616   1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
    617   1.7  christos       && (bfd_link_pic (info)
    618   1.1     skrll 	  || !hh->eh.def_regular
    619   1.1     skrll 	  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
    620   1.1     skrll     {
    621   1.1     skrll       /* We need an import stub.  Decide between hppa_stub_import
    622   1.1     skrll 	 and hppa_stub_import_shared later.  */
    623   1.1     skrll       return hppa_stub_import;
    624   1.1     skrll     }
    625   1.1     skrll 
    626  1.12  christos   if (destination == (bfd_vma) -1)
    627  1.12  christos     return hppa_stub_none;
    628  1.12  christos 
    629   1.1     skrll   /* Determine where the call point is.  */
    630   1.1     skrll   location = (input_sec->output_offset
    631   1.1     skrll 	      + input_sec->output_section->vma
    632   1.1     skrll 	      + rela->r_offset);
    633   1.1     skrll 
    634   1.1     skrll   branch_offset = destination - location - 8;
    635   1.1     skrll   r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
    636   1.1     skrll 
    637   1.1     skrll   /* Determine if a long branch stub is needed.  parisc branch offsets
    638   1.1     skrll      are relative to the second instruction past the branch, ie. +8
    639   1.1     skrll      bytes on from the branch instruction location.  The offset is
    640   1.1     skrll      signed and counts in units of 4 bytes.  */
    641   1.1     skrll   if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
    642   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (17 - 1)) << 2;
    643   1.1     skrll 
    644   1.1     skrll   else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
    645   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (12 - 1)) << 2;
    646   1.1     skrll 
    647   1.1     skrll   else /* R_PARISC_PCREL22F.  */
    648   1.1     skrll     max_branch_offset = (1 << (22 - 1)) << 2;
    649   1.1     skrll 
    650   1.1     skrll   if (branch_offset + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
    651   1.1     skrll     return hppa_stub_long_branch;
    652   1.1     skrll 
    653   1.1     skrll   return hppa_stub_none;
    654   1.1     skrll }
    655   1.1     skrll 
    656   1.1     skrll /* Build one linker stub as defined by the stub hash table entry GEN_ENTRY.
    657   1.1     skrll    IN_ARG contains the link info pointer.  */
    658   1.1     skrll 
    659   1.1     skrll #define LDIL_R1		0x20200000	/* ldil  LR'XXX,%r1		*/
    660   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR4_R1	0xe0202002	/* be,n  RR'XXX(%sr4,%r1)	*/
    661   1.1     skrll 
    662   1.1     skrll #define BL_R1		0xe8200000	/* b,l   .+8,%r1		*/
    663   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R1	0x28200000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r1,%r1		*/
    664   1.1     skrll #define DEPI_R1		0xd4201c1e	/* depi  0,31,2,%r1		*/
    665   1.1     skrll 
    666   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_DP	0x2b600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%dp,%r1		*/
    667   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R21	0x48350000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r21	*/
    668   1.1     skrll #define BV_R0_R21	0xeaa0c000	/* bv    %r0(%r21)		*/
    669   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_R19	0x48330000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%r19	*/
    670   1.1     skrll 
    671   1.1     skrll #define ADDIL_R19	0x2a600000	/* addil LR'XXX,%r19,%r1	*/
    672   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DP	0x483b0000	/* ldw   RR'XXX(%sr0,%r1),%dp	*/
    673   1.1     skrll 
    674  1.13  christos #define LDO_R1_R22	0x34360000	/* ldo   RR'XXX(%r1),%r22	*/
    675  1.13  christos #define LDW_R22_R21	0x0ec01095	/* ldw   0(%r22),%r21		*/
    676  1.13  christos #define LDW_R22_R19	0x0ec81093	/* ldw   4(%r22),%r19		*/
    677  1.13  christos 
    678   1.1     skrll #define LDSID_R21_R1	0x02a010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%r21),%r1	*/
    679   1.1     skrll #define MTSP_R1		0x00011820	/* mtsp  %r1,%sr0		*/
    680   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_R21	0xe2a00000	/* be    0(%sr0,%r21)		*/
    681   1.1     skrll #define STW_RP		0x6bc23fd1	/* stw   %rp,-24(%sr0,%sp)	*/
    682   1.1     skrll 
    683   1.1     skrll #define BL22_RP		0xe800a002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    684   1.1     skrll #define BL_RP		0xe8400002	/* b,l,n XXX,%rp		*/
    685   1.1     skrll #define NOP		0x08000240	/* nop				*/
    686   1.1     skrll #define LDW_RP		0x4bc23fd1	/* ldw   -24(%sr0,%sp),%rp	*/
    687   1.1     skrll #define LDSID_RP_R1	0x004010a1	/* ldsid (%sr0,%rp),%r1		*/
    688   1.1     skrll #define BE_SR0_RP	0xe0400002	/* be,n  0(%sr0,%rp)		*/
    689   1.1     skrll 
    690   1.1     skrll #ifndef R19_STUBS
    691   1.1     skrll #define R19_STUBS 1
    692   1.1     skrll #endif
    693   1.1     skrll 
    694   1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    695   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_R19
    696   1.1     skrll #else
    697   1.1     skrll #define LDW_R1_DLT	LDW_R1_DP
    698   1.1     skrll #endif
    699   1.1     skrll 
    700   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    701   1.1     skrll hppa_build_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    702   1.1     skrll {
    703   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    704   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
    705   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    706   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
    707   1.1     skrll   bfd *stub_bfd;
    708   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
    709   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma sym_value;
    710   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma insn;
    711   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma off;
    712   1.1     skrll   int val;
    713   1.1     skrll   int size;
    714   1.1     skrll 
    715   1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    716   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    717   1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *)in_arg;
    718   1.1     skrll 
    719   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    720   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    721   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
    722   1.3  christos 
    723   1.1     skrll   stub_sec = hsh->stub_sec;
    724   1.1     skrll 
    725   1.1     skrll   /* Make a note of the offset within the stubs for this entry.  */
    726   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_offset = stub_sec->size;
    727   1.1     skrll   loc = stub_sec->contents + hsh->stub_offset;
    728   1.1     skrll 
    729   1.1     skrll   stub_bfd = stub_sec->owner;
    730   1.1     skrll 
    731   1.1     skrll   switch (hsh->stub_type)
    732   1.1     skrll     {
    733   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch:
    734   1.1     skrll       /* Create the long branch.  A long branch is formed with "ldil"
    735   1.1     skrll 	 loading the upper bits of the target address into a register,
    736   1.1     skrll 	 then branching with "be" which adds in the lower bits.
    737   1.1     skrll 	 The "be" has its delay slot nullified.  */
    738   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    739   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    740   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    741   1.1     skrll 
    742   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel);
    743   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDIL_R1, val, 21);
    744   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    745   1.1     skrll 
    746   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    747   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    748   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    749   1.1     skrll 
    750  1.13  christos       size = LONG_BRANCH_STUB_SIZE;
    751   1.1     skrll       break;
    752   1.1     skrll 
    753   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_long_branch_shared:
    754   1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    755   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    756   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    757   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    758   1.1     skrll 
    759   1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from, more or less.  */
    760   1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    761   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    762   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    763   1.1     skrll 
    764   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BL_R1, loc);
    765   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_lrsel);
    766   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) ADDIL_R1, val, 21);
    767   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    768   1.1     skrll 
    769   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_rrsel) >> 2;
    770   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BE_SR4_R1, val, 17);
    771   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 8);
    772  1.13  christos       size = LONG_BRANCH_SHARED_STUB_SIZE;
    773   1.1     skrll       break;
    774   1.1     skrll 
    775   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import:
    776   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_import_shared:
    777   1.1     skrll       off = hsh->hh->eh.plt.offset;
    778   1.1     skrll       if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
    779   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
    780   1.1     skrll 
    781   1.1     skrll       off &= ~ (bfd_vma) 1;
    782   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (off
    783  1.11  christos 		   + htab->etab.splt->output_offset
    784  1.11  christos 		   + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma
    785  1.11  christos 		   - elf_gp (htab->etab.splt->output_section->owner));
    786   1.1     skrll 
    787   1.1     skrll       insn = ADDIL_DP;
    788   1.1     skrll #if R19_STUBS
    789   1.1     skrll       if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_import_shared)
    790   1.1     skrll 	insn = ADDIL_R19;
    791   1.1     skrll #endif
    792  1.13  christos 
    793  1.13  christos       /* Load function descriptor address into register %r22.  It is
    794  1.13  christos 	 sometimes needed for lazy binding.  */
    795   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_lrsel),
    796   1.1     skrll       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) insn, val, 21);
    797   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    798   1.1     skrll 
    799   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, 0, e_rrsel);
    800  1.13  christos       insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) LDO_R1_R22, val, 14);
    801   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc + 4);
    802   1.1     skrll 
    803  1.13  christos       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_R22_R21, loc + 8);
    804  1.13  christos 
    805   1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    806   1.1     skrll 	{
    807   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_R21_R1, loc + 12);
    808  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_R22_R19,  loc + 16);
    809  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,      loc + 20);
    810  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_R21,   loc + 24);
    811  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) STW_RP,       loc + 28);
    812   1.1     skrll 
    813  1.13  christos 	  size = IMPORT_SHARED_STUB_SIZE;
    814   1.1     skrll 	}
    815   1.1     skrll       else
    816   1.1     skrll 	{
    817  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BV_R0_R21, loc + 12);
    818  1.13  christos 	  bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_R22_R19, loc + 16);
    819   1.1     skrll 
    820  1.13  christos 	  size = IMPORT_STUB_SIZE;
    821   1.1     skrll 	}
    822   1.1     skrll 
    823   1.1     skrll       break;
    824   1.1     skrll 
    825   1.1     skrll     case hppa_stub_export:
    826   1.1     skrll       /* Branches are relative.  This is where we are going to.  */
    827   1.1     skrll       sym_value = (hsh->target_value
    828   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_offset
    829   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->target_section->output_section->vma);
    830   1.1     skrll 
    831   1.1     skrll       /* And this is where we are coming from.  */
    832   1.1     skrll       sym_value -= (hsh->stub_offset
    833   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_offset
    834   1.1     skrll 		    + stub_sec->output_section->vma);
    835   1.1     skrll 
    836   1.1     skrll       if (sym_value - 8 + (1 << (17 + 1)) >= (1 << (17 + 2))
    837   1.1     skrll 	  && (!htab->has_22bit_branch
    838   1.1     skrll 	      || sym_value - 8 + (1 << (22 + 1)) >= (1 << (22 + 2))))
    839   1.1     skrll 	{
    840  1.11  christos 	  _bfd_error_handler
    841  1.11  christos 	    /* xgettext:c-format */
    842  1.12  christos 	    (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): "
    843  1.12  christos 	       "cannot reach %s, recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
    844   1.1     skrll 	     hsh->target_section->owner,
    845   1.1     skrll 	     stub_sec,
    846  1.12  christos 	     (uint64_t) hsh->stub_offset,
    847   1.1     skrll 	     hsh->bh_root.string);
    848   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
    849   1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
    850   1.1     skrll 	}
    851   1.1     skrll 
    852   1.1     skrll       val = hppa_field_adjust (sym_value, (bfd_signed_vma) -8, e_fsel) >> 2;
    853   1.1     skrll       if (!htab->has_22bit_branch)
    854   1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL_RP, val, 17);
    855   1.1     skrll       else
    856   1.1     skrll 	insn = hppa_rebuild_insn ((int) BL22_RP, val, 22);
    857   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, insn, loc);
    858   1.1     skrll 
    859  1.11  christos       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) NOP,	   loc + 4);
    860   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDW_RP,      loc + 8);
    861   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) LDSID_RP_R1, loc + 12);
    862   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) MTSP_R1,     loc + 16);
    863   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (stub_bfd, (bfd_vma) BE_SR0_RP,   loc + 20);
    864   1.1     skrll 
    865   1.1     skrll       /* Point the function symbol at the stub.  */
    866   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.section = stub_sec;
    867   1.1     skrll       hsh->hh->eh.root.u.def.value = stub_sec->size;
    868   1.1     skrll 
    869  1.13  christos       size = EXPORT_STUB_SIZE;
    870   1.1     skrll       break;
    871   1.1     skrll 
    872   1.1     skrll     default:
    873   1.1     skrll       BFD_FAIL ();
    874   1.1     skrll       return FALSE;
    875   1.1     skrll     }
    876   1.1     skrll 
    877   1.1     skrll   stub_sec->size += size;
    878   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    879   1.1     skrll }
    880   1.1     skrll 
    881   1.1     skrll #undef LDIL_R1
    882   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR4_R1
    883   1.1     skrll #undef BL_R1
    884   1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R1
    885   1.1     skrll #undef DEPI_R1
    886   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R21
    887   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DLT
    888   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_R19
    889   1.1     skrll #undef ADDIL_R19
    890   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_R1_DP
    891   1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_R21_R1
    892   1.1     skrll #undef MTSP_R1
    893   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_R21
    894   1.1     skrll #undef STW_RP
    895   1.1     skrll #undef BV_R0_R21
    896   1.1     skrll #undef BL_RP
    897   1.1     skrll #undef NOP
    898   1.1     skrll #undef LDW_RP
    899   1.1     skrll #undef LDSID_RP_R1
    900   1.1     skrll #undef BE_SR0_RP
    901   1.1     skrll 
    902   1.1     skrll /* As above, but don't actually build the stub.  Just bump offset so
    903   1.1     skrll    we know stub section sizes.  */
    904   1.1     skrll 
    905   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    906   1.1     skrll hppa_size_one_stub (struct bfd_hash_entry *bh, void *in_arg)
    907   1.1     skrll {
    908   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
    909   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    910   1.1     skrll   int size;
    911   1.1     skrll 
    912   1.1     skrll   /* Massage our args to the form they really have.  */
    913   1.1     skrll   hsh = hppa_stub_hash_entry (bh);
    914   1.1     skrll   htab = in_arg;
    915   1.1     skrll 
    916   1.1     skrll   if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
    917  1.13  christos     size = LONG_BRANCH_STUB_SIZE;
    918   1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch_shared)
    919  1.13  christos     size = LONG_BRANCH_SHARED_STUB_SIZE;
    920   1.1     skrll   else if (hsh->stub_type == hppa_stub_export)
    921  1.13  christos     size = EXPORT_STUB_SIZE;
    922   1.1     skrll   else /* hppa_stub_import or hppa_stub_import_shared.  */
    923   1.1     skrll     {
    924   1.1     skrll       if (htab->multi_subspace)
    925  1.13  christos 	size = IMPORT_SHARED_STUB_SIZE;
    926   1.1     skrll       else
    927  1.13  christos 	size = IMPORT_STUB_SIZE;
    928   1.1     skrll     }
    929   1.1     skrll 
    930   1.1     skrll   hsh->stub_sec->size += size;
    931   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    932   1.1     skrll }
    933   1.1     skrll 
    934   1.1     skrll /* Return nonzero if ABFD represents an HPPA ELF32 file.
    935   1.1     skrll    Additionally we set the default architecture and machine.  */
    936   1.1     skrll 
    937   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    938   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_object_p (bfd *abfd)
    939   1.1     skrll {
    940   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Ehdr * i_ehdrp;
    941   1.1     skrll   unsigned int flags;
    942   1.1     skrll 
    943   1.1     skrll   i_ehdrp = elf_elfheader (abfd);
    944   1.1     skrll   if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-linux") == 0)
    945   1.1     skrll     {
    946   1.6  christos       /* GCC on hppa-linux produces binaries with OSABI=GNU,
    947   1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    948   1.6  christos       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_GNU &&
    949   1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    950   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    951   1.1     skrll     }
    952   1.1     skrll   else if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0)
    953   1.1     skrll     {
    954   1.1     skrll       /* GCC on hppa-netbsd produces binaries with OSABI=NetBSD,
    955   1.1     skrll 	 but the kernel produces corefiles with OSABI=SysV.  */
    956   1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NETBSD &&
    957   1.1     skrll 	  i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_NONE) /* aka SYSV */
    958   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    959   1.1     skrll     }
    960   1.1     skrll   else
    961   1.1     skrll     {
    962   1.1     skrll       if (i_ehdrp->e_ident[EI_OSABI] != ELFOSABI_HPUX)
    963   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
    964   1.1     skrll     }
    965   1.1     skrll 
    966   1.1     skrll   flags = i_ehdrp->e_flags;
    967   1.1     skrll   switch (flags & (EF_PARISC_ARCH | EF_PARISC_WIDE))
    968   1.1     skrll     {
    969   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_0:
    970   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 10);
    971   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_1_1:
    972   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 11);
    973   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0:
    974   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 20);
    975   1.1     skrll     case EFA_PARISC_2_0 | EF_PARISC_WIDE:
    976   1.1     skrll       return bfd_default_set_arch_mach (abfd, bfd_arch_hppa, 25);
    977   1.1     skrll     }
    978   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
    979   1.1     skrll }
    980   1.1     skrll 
    981   1.1     skrll /* Create the .plt and .got sections, and set up our hash table
    982   1.1     skrll    short-cuts to various dynamic sections.  */
    983   1.1     skrll 
    984   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
    985   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
    986   1.1     skrll {
    987   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
    988   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
    989   1.1     skrll 
    990   1.1     skrll   /* Don't try to create the .plt and .got twice.  */
    991   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
    992   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
    993   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
    994  1.11  christos   if (htab->etab.splt != NULL)
    995   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
    996   1.1     skrll 
    997   1.1     skrll   /* Call the generic code to do most of the work.  */
    998   1.1     skrll   if (! _bfd_elf_create_dynamic_sections (abfd, info))
    999   1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
   1000   1.1     skrll 
   1001   1.1     skrll   /* hppa-linux needs _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ to be visible from the main
   1002   1.1     skrll      application, because __canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare needs it.  */
   1003   1.1     skrll   eh = elf_hash_table (info)->hgot;
   1004   1.1     skrll   eh->forced_local = 0;
   1005   1.1     skrll   eh->other = STV_DEFAULT;
   1006   1.1     skrll   return bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh);
   1007   1.1     skrll }
   1008   1.1     skrll 
   1009   1.1     skrll /* Copy the extra info we tack onto an elf_link_hash_entry.  */
   1010   1.1     skrll 
   1011   1.1     skrll static void
   1012   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1013   1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_dir,
   1014   1.1     skrll 				 struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh_ind)
   1015   1.1     skrll {
   1016   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh_dir, *hh_ind;
   1017   1.1     skrll 
   1018   1.1     skrll   hh_dir = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_dir);
   1019   1.1     skrll   hh_ind = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_ind);
   1020   1.1     skrll 
   1021  1.11  christos   if (hh_ind->dyn_relocs != NULL
   1022  1.11  christos       && eh_ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1023   1.1     skrll     {
   1024   1.1     skrll       if (hh_dir->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   1025   1.1     skrll 	{
   1026  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **hdh_pp;
   1027  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1028   1.1     skrll 
   1029   1.1     skrll 	  /* Add reloc counts against the indirect sym to the direct sym
   1030   1.1     skrll 	     list.  Merge any entries against the same section.  */
   1031   1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh_ind->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; )
   1032   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1033  1.11  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_q;
   1034   1.1     skrll 
   1035   1.1     skrll 	      for (hdh_q = hh_dir->dyn_relocs;
   1036   1.1     skrll 		   hdh_q != NULL;
   1037  1.11  christos 		   hdh_q = hdh_q->next)
   1038   1.1     skrll 		if (hdh_q->sec == hdh_p->sec)
   1039   1.1     skrll 		  {
   1040   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1041  1.11  christos 		    hdh_q->pc_count += hdh_p->pc_count;
   1042   1.1     skrll #endif
   1043   1.1     skrll 		    hdh_q->count += hdh_p->count;
   1044  1.11  christos 		    *hdh_pp = hdh_p->next;
   1045   1.1     skrll 		    break;
   1046   1.1     skrll 		  }
   1047   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_q == NULL)
   1048  1.11  christos 		hdh_pp = &hdh_p->next;
   1049   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1050   1.1     skrll 	  *hdh_pp = hh_dir->dyn_relocs;
   1051   1.1     skrll 	}
   1052   1.1     skrll 
   1053   1.1     skrll       hh_dir->dyn_relocs = hh_ind->dyn_relocs;
   1054   1.1     skrll       hh_ind->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1055   1.1     skrll     }
   1056   1.1     skrll 
   1057  1.11  christos   if (eh_ind->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1058   1.1     skrll     {
   1059  1.11  christos       hh_dir->plabel |= hh_ind->plabel;
   1060  1.11  christos       hh_dir->tls_type |= hh_ind->tls_type;
   1061  1.11  christos       hh_ind->tls_type = GOT_UNKNOWN;
   1062   1.1     skrll     }
   1063   1.1     skrll 
   1064  1.11  christos   _bfd_elf_link_hash_copy_indirect (info, eh_dir, eh_ind);
   1065   1.1     skrll }
   1066   1.1     skrll 
   1067   1.1     skrll static int
   1068   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   1069   1.1     skrll 				int r_type, int is_local ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED)
   1070   1.1     skrll {
   1071   1.1     skrll   /* For now we don't support linker optimizations.  */
   1072   1.1     skrll   return r_type;
   1073   1.1     skrll }
   1074   1.1     skrll 
   1075   1.3  christos /* Return a pointer to the local GOT, PLT and TLS reference counts
   1076   1.3  christos    for ABFD.  Returns NULL if the storage allocation fails.  */
   1077   1.3  christos 
   1078   1.3  christos static bfd_signed_vma *
   1079   1.3  christos hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (bfd *abfd)
   1080   1.3  christos {
   1081   1.3  christos   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1082   1.3  christos   bfd_signed_vma *local_refcounts;
   1083   1.7  christos 
   1084   1.3  christos   local_refcounts = elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd);
   1085   1.3  christos   if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1086   1.3  christos     {
   1087   1.3  christos       bfd_size_type size;
   1088   1.3  christos 
   1089   1.3  christos       /* Allocate space for local GOT and PLT reference
   1090   1.3  christos 	 counts.  Done this way to save polluting elf_obj_tdata
   1091   1.3  christos 	 with another target specific pointer.  */
   1092   1.3  christos       size = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1093   1.3  christos       size *= 2 * sizeof (bfd_signed_vma);
   1094   1.3  christos       /* Add in space to store the local GOT TLS types.  */
   1095   1.3  christos       size += symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   1096   1.3  christos       local_refcounts = bfd_zalloc (abfd, size);
   1097   1.3  christos       if (local_refcounts == NULL)
   1098   1.3  christos 	return NULL;
   1099   1.3  christos       elf_local_got_refcounts (abfd) = local_refcounts;
   1100   1.3  christos       memset (hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd), GOT_UNKNOWN,
   1101   1.3  christos 	      symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1102   1.3  christos     }
   1103   1.3  christos   return local_refcounts;
   1104   1.3  christos }
   1105   1.3  christos 
   1106   1.3  christos 
   1107   1.1     skrll /* Look through the relocs for a section during the first phase, and
   1108   1.1     skrll    calculate needed space in the global offset table, procedure linkage
   1109   1.1     skrll    table, and dynamic reloc sections.  At this point we haven't
   1110   1.1     skrll    necessarily read all the input files.  */
   1111   1.1     skrll 
   1112   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1113   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_check_relocs (bfd *abfd,
   1114   1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1115   1.1     skrll 			 asection *sec,
   1116   1.1     skrll 			 const Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs)
   1117   1.1     skrll {
   1118   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   1119   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   1120   1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   1121   1.1     skrll   const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela_end;
   1122   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1123   1.1     skrll   asection *sreloc;
   1124   1.1     skrll 
   1125   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   1126   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1127   1.1     skrll 
   1128   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1129   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1130   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1131   1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (abfd)->symtab_hdr;
   1132   1.1     skrll   eh_syms = elf_sym_hashes (abfd);
   1133   1.1     skrll   sreloc = NULL;
   1134   1.1     skrll 
   1135   1.1     skrll   rela_end = relocs + sec->reloc_count;
   1136   1.1     skrll   for (rela = relocs; rela < rela_end; rela++)
   1137   1.1     skrll     {
   1138   1.1     skrll       enum {
   1139   1.1     skrll 	NEED_GOT = 1,
   1140   1.1     skrll 	NEED_PLT = 2,
   1141   1.1     skrll 	NEED_DYNREL = 4,
   1142   1.1     skrll 	PLT_PLABEL = 8
   1143   1.1     skrll       };
   1144   1.1     skrll 
   1145   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx, r_type;
   1146   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1147   1.1     skrll       int need_entry = 0;
   1148   1.1     skrll 
   1149   1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   1150   1.1     skrll 
   1151   1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   1152   1.1     skrll 	hh = NULL;
   1153   1.1     skrll       else
   1154   1.1     skrll 	{
   1155   1.1     skrll 	  hh =  hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh_syms[r_symndx - symtab_hdr->sh_info]);
   1156   1.1     skrll 	  while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   1157   1.1     skrll 		 || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   1158   1.1     skrll 	    hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   1159   1.1     skrll 	}
   1160   1.1     skrll 
   1161   1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   1162   1.1     skrll       r_type = elf32_hppa_optimized_tls_reloc (info, r_type, hh == NULL);
   1163   1.1     skrll 
   1164   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   1165   1.1     skrll 	{
   1166   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   1167   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   1168   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   1169   1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol requires a global offset table entry.  */
   1170   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1171   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1172   1.1     skrll 
   1173   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R: /* "Official" procedure labels.  */
   1174   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   1175   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   1176   1.1     skrll 	  /* If the addend is non-zero, we break badly.  */
   1177   1.1     skrll 	  if (rela->r_addend != 0)
   1178   1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   1179   1.1     skrll 
   1180   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, then we need to
   1181   1.1     skrll 	     create a PLT entry for all PLABELs, because PLABELs with
   1182   1.1     skrll 	     local symbols may be passed via a pointer to another
   1183   1.1     skrll 	     object.  Additionally, output a dynamic relocation
   1184   1.1     skrll 	     pointing to the PLT entry.
   1185   1.1     skrll 
   1186   1.1     skrll 	     For executables, the original 32-bit ABI allowed two
   1187   1.1     skrll 	     different styles of PLABELs (function pointers):  For
   1188   1.1     skrll 	     global functions, the PLABEL word points into the .plt
   1189   1.1     skrll 	     two bytes past a (function address, gp) pair, and for
   1190   1.1     skrll 	     local functions the PLABEL points directly at the
   1191   1.1     skrll 	     function.  The magic +2 for the first type allows us to
   1192   1.1     skrll 	     differentiate between the two.  As you can imagine, this
   1193   1.1     skrll 	     is a real pain when it comes to generating code to call
   1194   1.1     skrll 	     functions indirectly or to compare function pointers.
   1195   1.1     skrll 	     We avoid the mess by always pointing a PLABEL into the
   1196   1.1     skrll 	     .plt, even for local functions.  */
   1197  1.11  christos 	  need_entry = PLT_PLABEL | NEED_PLT;
   1198  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1199  1.11  christos 	    need_entry |= NEED_DYNREL;
   1200   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1201   1.1     skrll 
   1202   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   1203   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_12bit_branch = 1;
   1204   1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1205   1.1     skrll 
   1206   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   1207   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   1208   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_17bit_branch = 1;
   1209   1.1     skrll 	  goto branch_common;
   1210   1.1     skrll 
   1211   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   1212   1.1     skrll 	  htab->has_22bit_branch = 1;
   1213   1.1     skrll 	branch_common:
   1214   1.1     skrll 	  /* Function calls might need to go through the .plt, and
   1215   1.1     skrll 	     might require long branch stubs.  */
   1216   1.1     skrll 	  if (hh == NULL)
   1217   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1218   1.1     skrll 	      /* We know local syms won't need a .plt entry, and if
   1219   1.1     skrll 		 they need a long branch stub we can't guarantee that
   1220   1.1     skrll 		 we can reach the stub.  So just flag an error later
   1221   1.1     skrll 		 if we're doing a shared link and find we need a long
   1222   1.1     skrll 		 branch stub.  */
   1223   1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   1224   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1225   1.1     skrll 	  else
   1226   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1227   1.1     skrll 	      /* Global symbols will need a .plt entry if they remain
   1228   1.1     skrll 		 global, and in most cases won't need a long branch
   1229   1.1     skrll 		 stub.  Unfortunately, we have to cater for the case
   1230   1.1     skrll 		 where a symbol is forced local by versioning, or due
   1231   1.1     skrll 		 to symbolic linking, and we lose the .plt entry.  */
   1232   1.1     skrll 	      need_entry = NEED_PLT;
   1233   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh->eh.type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   1234   1.1     skrll 		need_entry = 0;
   1235   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1236   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1237   1.1     skrll 
   1238   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:  /* Used to set segment base.  */
   1239   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32: /* Relative reloc, used for unwind.  */
   1240   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14F: /* PC relative load/store.  */
   1241   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   1242   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL17R: /* External branches.  */
   1243   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL21L: /* As above, and for load/store too.  */
   1244   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   1245   1.1     skrll 	  /* We don't need to propagate the relocation if linking a
   1246   1.1     skrll 	     shared object since these are section relative.  */
   1247   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1248   1.1     skrll 
   1249   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F: /* Used for gp rel data load/store.  */
   1250   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   1251   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   1252   1.7  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1253   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1254  1.11  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   1255  1.11  christos 		/* xgettext:c-format */
   1256  1.12  christos 		(_("%pB: relocation %s can not be used when making a shared object; recompile with -fPIC"),
   1257   1.1     skrll 		 abfd,
   1258   1.1     skrll 		 elf_hppa_howto_table[r_type].name);
   1259   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1260   1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   1261   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1262   1.1     skrll 	  /* Fall through.  */
   1263   1.1     skrll 
   1264   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F: /* Used for external branches.  */
   1265   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   1266   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F: /* Used for load/store from absolute locn.  */
   1267   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   1268   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L: /* As above, and for ext branches too.  */
   1269   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32: /* .word relocs.  */
   1270   1.1     skrll 	  /* We may want to output a dynamic relocation later.  */
   1271   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_DYNREL;
   1272   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1273   1.1     skrll 
   1274   1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes the C++ object vtable hierarchy.
   1275   1.1     skrll 	     Reconstruct it for later use during GC.  */
   1276   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1277   1.1     skrll 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtinherit (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_offset))
   1278   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1279   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1280   1.1     skrll 
   1281   1.1     skrll 	  /* This relocation describes which C++ vtable entries are actually
   1282   1.1     skrll 	     used.  Record for later use during GC.  */
   1283   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1284  1.13  christos 	  if (!bfd_elf_gc_record_vtentry (abfd, sec, &hh->eh, rela->r_addend))
   1285   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   1286   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1287   1.1     skrll 
   1288   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1289   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1290   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1291   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1292   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1293   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1294   1.1     skrll 
   1295   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1296   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1297  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_dll (info))
   1298  1.11  christos 	    info->flags |= DF_STATIC_TLS;
   1299   1.1     skrll 	  need_entry = NEED_GOT;
   1300   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   1301   1.1     skrll 
   1302   1.1     skrll 	default:
   1303   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   1304   1.1     skrll 	}
   1305   1.1     skrll 
   1306   1.1     skrll       /* Now carry out our orders.  */
   1307   1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_GOT)
   1308   1.1     skrll 	{
   1309  1.11  christos 	  int tls_type = GOT_NORMAL;
   1310  1.11  christos 
   1311   1.1     skrll 	  switch (r_type)
   1312   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1313   1.1     skrll 	    default:
   1314   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1315   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   1316   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   1317  1.11  christos 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_GD;
   1318   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1319   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   1320   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   1321  1.11  christos 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_LDM;
   1322   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1323   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   1324   1.1     skrll 	    case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   1325  1.11  christos 	      tls_type = GOT_TLS_IE;
   1326   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   1327   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1328   1.1     skrll 
   1329   1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate space for a GOT entry, as well as a dynamic
   1330   1.1     skrll 	     relocation for this entry.  */
   1331  1.11  christos 	  if (htab->etab.sgot == NULL)
   1332   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1333   1.1     skrll 	      if (!elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections (htab->etab.dynobj, info))
   1334   1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   1335   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1336   1.1     skrll 
   1337  1.11  christos 	  if (hh != NULL)
   1338  1.11  christos 	    {
   1339  1.11  christos 	      if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_LDM)
   1340  1.11  christos 		htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1341  1.11  christos 	      else
   1342  1.11  christos 		hh->eh.got.refcount += 1;
   1343  1.11  christos 	      hh->tls_type |= tls_type;
   1344  1.11  christos 	    }
   1345   1.1     skrll 	  else
   1346   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1347  1.11  christos 	      bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1348  1.11  christos 
   1349  1.11  christos 	      /* This is a global offset table entry for a local symbol.  */
   1350  1.11  christos 	      local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1351  1.11  christos 	      if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1352  1.11  christos 		return FALSE;
   1353  1.11  christos 	      if (tls_type == GOT_TLS_LDM)
   1354  1.11  christos 		htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount += 1;
   1355   1.1     skrll 	      else
   1356  1.11  christos 		local_got_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1357   1.1     skrll 
   1358  1.11  christos 	      hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (abfd) [r_symndx] |= tls_type;
   1359   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1360   1.1     skrll 	}
   1361   1.1     skrll 
   1362   1.1     skrll       if (need_entry & NEED_PLT)
   1363   1.1     skrll 	{
   1364   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library, and this is a reloc
   1365   1.1     skrll 	     against a weak symbol or a global symbol in a dynamic
   1366   1.1     skrll 	     object, then we will be creating an import stub and a
   1367   1.1     skrll 	     .plt entry for the symbol.  Similarly, on a normal link
   1368   1.1     skrll 	     to symbols defined in a dynamic object we'll need the
   1369   1.1     skrll 	     import stub and a .plt entry.  We don't know yet whether
   1370   1.1     skrll 	     the symbol is defined or not, so make an entry anyway and
   1371   1.1     skrll 	     clean up later in adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   1372   1.1     skrll 	  if ((sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
   1373   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1374   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1375   1.1     skrll 		{
   1376   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.needs_plt = 1;
   1377   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.plt.refcount += 1;
   1378   1.1     skrll 
   1379   1.1     skrll 		  /* If this .plt entry is for a plabel, mark it so
   1380   1.1     skrll 		     that adjust_dynamic_symbol will keep the entry
   1381   1.1     skrll 		     even if it appears to be local.  */
   1382   1.1     skrll 		  if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1383   1.1     skrll 		    hh->plabel = 1;
   1384   1.1     skrll 		}
   1385   1.1     skrll 	      else if (need_entry & PLT_PLABEL)
   1386   1.1     skrll 		{
   1387   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_got_refcounts;
   1388   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_signed_vma *local_plt_refcounts;
   1389   1.1     skrll 
   1390   1.3  christos 		  local_got_refcounts = hppa32_elf_local_refcounts (abfd);
   1391   1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_refcounts == NULL)
   1392   1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1393   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts = (local_got_refcounts
   1394   1.1     skrll 					 + symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   1395   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_refcounts[r_symndx] += 1;
   1396   1.1     skrll 		}
   1397   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1398   1.1     skrll 	}
   1399   1.1     skrll 
   1400  1.11  christos       if ((need_entry & NEED_DYNREL) != 0
   1401  1.11  christos 	  && (sec->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0)
   1402   1.1     skrll 	{
   1403   1.1     skrll 	  /* Flag this symbol as having a non-got, non-plt reference
   1404   1.1     skrll 	     so that we generate copy relocs if it turns out to be
   1405   1.1     skrll 	     dynamic.  */
   1406  1.11  christos 	  if (hh != NULL)
   1407   1.1     skrll 	    hh->eh.non_got_ref = 1;
   1408   1.1     skrll 
   1409   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we are creating a shared library then we need to copy
   1410   1.1     skrll 	     the reloc into the shared library.  However, if we are
   1411   1.1     skrll 	     linking with -Bsymbolic, we need only copy absolute
   1412   1.1     skrll 	     relocs or relocs against symbols that are not defined in
   1413   1.1     skrll 	     an object we are including in the link.  PC- or DP- or
   1414   1.1     skrll 	     DLT-relative relocs against any local sym or global sym
   1415   1.1     skrll 	     with DEF_REGULAR set, can be discarded.  At this point we
   1416   1.1     skrll 	     have not seen all the input files, so it is possible that
   1417   1.1     skrll 	     DEF_REGULAR is not set now but will be set later (it is
   1418   1.1     skrll 	     never cleared).  We account for that possibility below by
   1419   1.1     skrll 	     storing information in the dyn_relocs field of the
   1420   1.1     skrll 	     hash table entry.
   1421   1.1     skrll 
   1422   1.1     skrll 	     A similar situation to the -Bsymbolic case occurs when
   1423   1.1     skrll 	     creating shared libraries and symbol visibility changes
   1424   1.1     skrll 	     render the symbol local.
   1425   1.1     skrll 
   1426   1.1     skrll 	     As it turns out, all the relocs we will be creating here
   1427   1.1     skrll 	     are absolute, so we cannot remove them on -Bsymbolic
   1428   1.1     skrll 	     links or visibility changes anyway.  A STUB_REL reloc
   1429   1.1     skrll 	     is absolute too, as in that case it is the reloc in the
   1430   1.1     skrll 	     stub we will be creating, rather than copying the PCREL
   1431   1.1     skrll 	     reloc in the branch.
   1432   1.1     skrll 
   1433   1.1     skrll 	     If on the other hand, we are creating an executable, we
   1434   1.1     skrll 	     may need to keep relocations for symbols satisfied by a
   1435   1.1     skrll 	     dynamic library if we manage to avoid copy relocs for the
   1436   1.1     skrll 	     symbol.  */
   1437   1.7  christos 	  if ((bfd_link_pic (info)
   1438   1.1     skrll 	       && (IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   1439   1.1     skrll 		   || (hh != NULL
   1440   1.7  christos 		       && (!SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, &hh->eh)
   1441   1.1     skrll 			   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1442   1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))))
   1443   1.1     skrll 	      || (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1444   1.7  christos 		  && !bfd_link_pic (info)
   1445   1.1     skrll 		  && hh != NULL
   1446   1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak
   1447   1.1     skrll 		      || !hh->eh.def_regular)))
   1448   1.1     skrll 	    {
   1449  1.11  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1450  1.11  christos 	      struct elf_dyn_relocs **hdh_head;
   1451   1.1     skrll 
   1452   1.1     skrll 	      /* Create a reloc section in dynobj and make room for
   1453   1.1     skrll 		 this reloc.  */
   1454   1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   1455   1.1     skrll 		{
   1456   1.3  christos 		  sreloc = _bfd_elf_make_dynamic_reloc_section
   1457   1.3  christos 		    (sec, htab->etab.dynobj, 2, abfd, /*rela?*/ TRUE);
   1458   1.3  christos 
   1459   1.1     skrll 		  if (sreloc == NULL)
   1460   1.1     skrll 		    {
   1461   1.3  christos 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   1462   1.3  christos 		      return FALSE;
   1463   1.1     skrll 		    }
   1464   1.1     skrll 		}
   1465   1.1     skrll 
   1466   1.1     skrll 	      /* If this is a global symbol, we count the number of
   1467   1.1     skrll 		 relocations we need for this symbol.  */
   1468   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   1469   1.1     skrll 		{
   1470   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_head = &hh->dyn_relocs;
   1471   1.1     skrll 		}
   1472   1.1     skrll 	      else
   1473   1.1     skrll 		{
   1474   1.1     skrll 		  /* Track dynamic relocs needed for local syms too.
   1475   1.1     skrll 		     We really need local syms available to do this
   1476   1.1     skrll 		     easily.  Oh well.  */
   1477   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sr;
   1478   1.1     skrll 		  void *vpp;
   1479   1.3  christos 		  Elf_Internal_Sym *isym;
   1480   1.3  christos 
   1481   1.3  christos 		  isym = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
   1482   1.3  christos 						abfd, r_symndx);
   1483   1.3  christos 		  if (isym == NULL)
   1484   1.3  christos 		    return FALSE;
   1485   1.1     skrll 
   1486   1.3  christos 		  sr = bfd_section_from_elf_index (abfd, isym->st_shndx);
   1487   1.1     skrll 		  if (sr == NULL)
   1488   1.3  christos 		    sr = sec;
   1489   1.1     skrll 
   1490   1.1     skrll 		  vpp = &elf_section_data (sr)->local_dynrel;
   1491  1.11  christos 		  hdh_head = (struct elf_dyn_relocs **) vpp;
   1492   1.1     skrll 		}
   1493   1.1     skrll 
   1494   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p = *hdh_head;
   1495   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p == NULL || hdh_p->sec != sec)
   1496   1.1     skrll 		{
   1497   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p = bfd_alloc (htab->etab.dynobj, sizeof *hdh_p);
   1498   1.1     skrll 		  if (hdh_p == NULL)
   1499   1.1     skrll 		    return FALSE;
   1500  1.11  christos 		  hdh_p->next = *hdh_head;
   1501   1.1     skrll 		  *hdh_head = hdh_p;
   1502   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->sec = sec;
   1503   1.1     skrll 		  hdh_p->count = 0;
   1504   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1505  1.11  christos 		  hdh_p->pc_count = 0;
   1506   1.1     skrll #endif
   1507   1.1     skrll 		}
   1508   1.1     skrll 
   1509   1.1     skrll 	      hdh_p->count += 1;
   1510   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   1511   1.1     skrll 	      if (!IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (rtype))
   1512  1.11  christos 		hdh_p->pc_count += 1;
   1513   1.1     skrll #endif
   1514   1.1     skrll 	    }
   1515   1.1     skrll 	}
   1516   1.1     skrll     }
   1517   1.1     skrll 
   1518   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1519   1.1     skrll }
   1520   1.1     skrll 
   1521   1.1     skrll /* Return the section that should be marked against garbage collection
   1522   1.1     skrll    for a given relocation.  */
   1523   1.1     skrll 
   1524   1.1     skrll static asection *
   1525   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook (asection *sec,
   1526   1.1     skrll 			 struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1527   1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   1528   1.1     skrll 			 struct elf_link_hash_entry *hh,
   1529   1.1     skrll 			 Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   1530   1.1     skrll {
   1531   1.1     skrll   if (hh != NULL)
   1532   1.1     skrll     switch ((unsigned int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   1533   1.1     skrll       {
   1534   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT:
   1535   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY:
   1536   1.1     skrll 	return NULL;
   1537   1.1     skrll       }
   1538   1.1     skrll 
   1539   1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elf_gc_mark_hook (sec, info, rela, hh, sym);
   1540   1.1     skrll }
   1541   1.1     skrll 
   1542   1.1     skrll /* Support for core dump NOTE sections.  */
   1543   1.1     skrll 
   1544   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1545   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1546   1.1     skrll {
   1547   1.1     skrll   int offset;
   1548   1.1     skrll   size_t size;
   1549   1.1     skrll 
   1550   1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1551   1.1     skrll     {
   1552   1.1     skrll       default:
   1553   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   1554   1.1     skrll 
   1555   1.1     skrll       case 396:		/* Linux/hppa */
   1556   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_cursig */
   1557   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->signal = bfd_get_16 (abfd, note->descdata + 12);
   1558   1.1     skrll 
   1559   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_pid */
   1560   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->lwpid = bfd_get_32 (abfd, note->descdata + 24);
   1561   1.1     skrll 
   1562   1.1     skrll 	/* pr_reg */
   1563   1.1     skrll 	offset = 72;
   1564   1.1     skrll 	size = 320;
   1565   1.1     skrll 
   1566   1.1     skrll 	break;
   1567   1.1     skrll     }
   1568   1.1     skrll 
   1569   1.1     skrll   /* Make a ".reg/999" section.  */
   1570   1.1     skrll   return _bfd_elfcore_make_pseudosection (abfd, ".reg",
   1571   1.1     skrll 					  size, note->descpos + offset);
   1572   1.1     skrll }
   1573   1.1     skrll 
   1574   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1575   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo (bfd *abfd, Elf_Internal_Note *note)
   1576   1.1     skrll {
   1577   1.1     skrll   switch (note->descsz)
   1578   1.1     skrll     {
   1579   1.1     skrll       default:
   1580   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   1581   1.1     skrll 
   1582   1.1     skrll       case 124:		/* Linux/hppa elf_prpsinfo.  */
   1583   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->program
   1584   1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 28, 16);
   1585   1.7  christos 	elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command
   1586   1.1     skrll 	  = _bfd_elfcore_strndup (abfd, note->descdata + 44, 80);
   1587   1.1     skrll     }
   1588   1.1     skrll 
   1589   1.1     skrll   /* Note that for some reason, a spurious space is tacked
   1590   1.1     skrll      onto the end of the args in some (at least one anyway)
   1591   1.1     skrll      implementations, so strip it off if it exists.  */
   1592   1.1     skrll   {
   1593   1.7  christos     char *command = elf_tdata (abfd)->core->command;
   1594   1.1     skrll     int n = strlen (command);
   1595   1.1     skrll 
   1596   1.1     skrll     if (0 < n && command[n - 1] == ' ')
   1597   1.1     skrll       command[n - 1] = '\0';
   1598   1.1     skrll   }
   1599   1.1     skrll 
   1600   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1601   1.1     skrll }
   1602   1.1     skrll 
   1603   1.1     skrll /* Our own version of hide_symbol, so that we can keep plt entries for
   1604   1.1     skrll    plabels.  */
   1605   1.1     skrll 
   1606   1.1     skrll static void
   1607   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_hide_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1608   1.1     skrll 			struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   1609   1.1     skrll 			bfd_boolean force_local)
   1610   1.1     skrll {
   1611   1.1     skrll   if (force_local)
   1612   1.1     skrll     {
   1613   1.1     skrll       eh->forced_local = 1;
   1614   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   1615   1.1     skrll 	{
   1616   1.1     skrll 	  eh->dynindx = -1;
   1617   1.1     skrll 	  _bfd_elf_strtab_delref (elf_hash_table (info)->dynstr,
   1618   1.1     skrll 				  eh->dynstr_index);
   1619   1.1     skrll 	}
   1620   1.7  christos 
   1621   1.7  christos       /* PR 16082: Remove version information from hidden symbol.  */
   1622   1.7  christos       eh->verinfo.verdef = NULL;
   1623   1.7  christos       eh->verinfo.vertree = NULL;
   1624   1.1     skrll     }
   1625   1.1     skrll 
   1626   1.6  christos   /* STT_GNU_IFUNC symbol must go through PLT.  */
   1627   1.6  christos   if (! hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel
   1628   1.6  christos       && eh->type != STT_GNU_IFUNC)
   1629   1.1     skrll     {
   1630   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1631   1.6  christos       eh->plt = elf_hash_table (info)->init_plt_offset;
   1632   1.1     skrll     }
   1633   1.1     skrll }
   1634   1.1     skrll 
   1635  1.11  christos /* Find any dynamic relocs that apply to read-only sections.  */
   1636  1.11  christos 
   1637  1.11  christos static asection *
   1638  1.11  christos readonly_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1639  1.11  christos {
   1640  1.11  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1641  1.11  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1642  1.11  christos 
   1643  1.11  christos   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1644  1.11  christos   for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->next)
   1645  1.11  christos     {
   1646  1.11  christos       asection *sec = hdh_p->sec->output_section;
   1647  1.11  christos 
   1648  1.11  christos       if (sec != NULL && (sec->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1649  1.11  christos 	return hdh_p->sec;
   1650  1.11  christos     }
   1651  1.11  christos   return NULL;
   1652  1.11  christos }
   1653  1.11  christos 
   1654  1.11  christos /* Return true if we have dynamic relocs against H or any of its weak
   1655  1.11  christos    aliases, that apply to read-only sections.  Cannot be used after
   1656  1.11  christos    size_dynamic_sections.  */
   1657  1.11  christos 
   1658  1.11  christos static bfd_boolean
   1659  1.11  christos alias_readonly_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1660  1.11  christos {
   1661  1.11  christos   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1662  1.11  christos   do
   1663  1.11  christos     {
   1664  1.11  christos       if (readonly_dynrelocs (&hh->eh))
   1665  1.11  christos 	return TRUE;
   1666  1.11  christos       hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.u.alias);
   1667  1.11  christos     } while (hh != NULL && &hh->eh != eh);
   1668  1.11  christos 
   1669  1.11  christos   return FALSE;
   1670  1.11  christos }
   1671  1.11  christos 
   1672   1.1     skrll /* Adjust a symbol defined by a dynamic object and referenced by a
   1673   1.1     skrll    regular object.  The current definition is in some section of the
   1674   1.1     skrll    dynamic object, but we're not including those sections.  We have to
   1675   1.1     skrll    change the definition to something the rest of the link can
   1676   1.1     skrll    understand.  */
   1677   1.1     skrll 
   1678   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1679   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1680   1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1681   1.1     skrll {
   1682   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1683  1.11  christos   asection *sec, *srel;
   1684   1.1     skrll 
   1685   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a function, put it in the procedure linkage table.  We
   1686   1.1     skrll      will fill in the contents of the procedure linkage table later.  */
   1687   1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_FUNC
   1688   1.1     skrll       || eh->needs_plt)
   1689   1.1     skrll     {
   1690  1.11  christos       bfd_boolean local = (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, eh)
   1691  1.11  christos 			   || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh));
   1692  1.11  christos       /* Discard dyn_relocs when non-pic if we've decided that a
   1693  1.11  christos 	 function symbol is local.  */
   1694  1.11  christos       if (!bfd_link_pic (info) && local)
   1695  1.11  christos 	hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1696  1.11  christos 
   1697   1.6  christos       /* If the symbol is used by a plabel, we must allocate a PLT slot.
   1698   1.6  christos 	 The refcounts are not reliable when it has been hidden since
   1699   1.6  christos 	 hide_symbol can be called before the plabel flag is set.  */
   1700  1.11  christos       if (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->plabel)
   1701   1.6  christos 	eh->plt.refcount = 1;
   1702   1.6  christos 
   1703  1.11  christos       /* Note that unlike some other backends, the refcount is not
   1704  1.11  christos 	 incremented for a non-call (and non-plabel) function reference.  */
   1705  1.11  christos       else if (eh->plt.refcount <= 0
   1706  1.11  christos 	       || local)
   1707   1.1     skrll 	{
   1708   1.1     skrll 	  /* The .plt entry is not needed when:
   1709   1.1     skrll 	     a) Garbage collection has removed all references to the
   1710   1.1     skrll 	     symbol, or
   1711   1.1     skrll 	     b) We know for certain the symbol is defined in this
   1712   1.1     skrll 	     object, and it's not a weak definition, nor is the symbol
   1713   1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel relocation.  Either this object is the
   1714   1.1     skrll 	     application or we are doing a shared symbolic link.  */
   1715   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1716   1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1717   1.1     skrll 	}
   1718   1.1     skrll 
   1719  1.11  christos       /* Unlike other targets, elf32-hppa.c does not define a function
   1720  1.11  christos 	 symbol in a non-pic executable on PLT stub code, so we don't
   1721  1.11  christos 	 have a local definition in that case.  ie. dyn_relocs can't
   1722  1.11  christos 	 be discarded.  */
   1723  1.11  christos 
   1724  1.11  christos       /* Function symbols can't have copy relocs.  */
   1725   1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1726   1.1     skrll     }
   1727   1.1     skrll   else
   1728   1.1     skrll     eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1729   1.1     skrll 
   1730  1.11  christos   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1731  1.11  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1732  1.11  christos     return FALSE;
   1733  1.11  christos 
   1734   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a weak symbol, and there is a real definition, the
   1735   1.1     skrll      processor independent code will have arranged for us to see the
   1736   1.1     skrll      real definition first, and we can just use the same value.  */
   1737  1.11  christos   if (eh->is_weakalias)
   1738   1.1     skrll     {
   1739  1.11  christos       struct elf_link_hash_entry *def = weakdef (eh);
   1740  1.11  christos       BFD_ASSERT (def->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined);
   1741  1.11  christos       eh->root.u.def.section = def->root.u.def.section;
   1742  1.11  christos       eh->root.u.def.value = def->root.u.def.value;
   1743  1.11  christos       if (def->root.u.def.section == htab->etab.sdynbss
   1744  1.11  christos 	  || def->root.u.def.section == htab->etab.sdynrelro)
   1745  1.11  christos 	hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1746   1.1     skrll       return TRUE;
   1747   1.1     skrll     }
   1748   1.1     skrll 
   1749   1.1     skrll   /* This is a reference to a symbol defined by a dynamic object which
   1750   1.1     skrll      is not a function.  */
   1751   1.1     skrll 
   1752   1.1     skrll   /* If we are creating a shared library, we must presume that the
   1753   1.1     skrll      only references to the symbol are via the global offset table.
   1754   1.1     skrll      For such cases we need not do anything here; the relocations will
   1755   1.1     skrll      be handled correctly by relocate_section.  */
   1756   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1757   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1758   1.1     skrll 
   1759   1.1     skrll   /* If there are no references to this symbol that do not use the
   1760   1.1     skrll      GOT, we don't need to generate a copy reloc.  */
   1761   1.1     skrll   if (!eh->non_got_ref)
   1762   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1763   1.1     skrll 
   1764  1.11  christos   /* If -z nocopyreloc was given, we won't generate them either.  */
   1765  1.11  christos   if (info->nocopyreloc)
   1766  1.11  christos     return TRUE;
   1767   1.1     skrll 
   1768  1.11  christos   /* If we don't find any dynamic relocs in read-only sections, then
   1769  1.11  christos      we'll be keeping the dynamic relocs and avoiding the copy reloc.  */
   1770  1.11  christos   if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS
   1771  1.11  christos       && !alias_readonly_dynrelocs (eh))
   1772  1.11  christos     return TRUE;
   1773   1.1     skrll 
   1774   1.1     skrll   /* We must allocate the symbol in our .dynbss section, which will
   1775   1.1     skrll      become part of the .bss section of the executable.  There will be
   1776   1.1     skrll      an entry for this symbol in the .dynsym section.  The dynamic
   1777   1.1     skrll      object will contain position independent code, so all references
   1778   1.1     skrll      from the dynamic object to this symbol will go through the global
   1779   1.1     skrll      offset table.  The dynamic linker will use the .dynsym entry to
   1780   1.1     skrll      determine the address it must put in the global offset table, so
   1781   1.1     skrll      both the dynamic object and the regular object will refer to the
   1782   1.1     skrll      same memory location for the variable.  */
   1783  1.11  christos   if ((eh->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   1784  1.11  christos     {
   1785  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sdynrelro;
   1786  1.11  christos       srel = htab->etab.sreldynrelro;
   1787  1.11  christos     }
   1788  1.11  christos   else
   1789  1.11  christos     {
   1790  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sdynbss;
   1791  1.11  christos       srel = htab->etab.srelbss;
   1792  1.11  christos     }
   1793   1.6  christos   if ((eh->root.u.def.section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) != 0 && eh->size != 0)
   1794   1.1     skrll     {
   1795  1.11  christos       /* We must generate a COPY reloc to tell the dynamic linker to
   1796  1.11  christos 	 copy the initial value out of the dynamic object and into the
   1797  1.11  christos 	 runtime process image.  */
   1798  1.11  christos       srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1799   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_copy = 1;
   1800   1.1     skrll     }
   1801   1.1     skrll 
   1802  1.11  christos   /* We no longer want dyn_relocs.  */
   1803  1.11  christos   hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1804  1.11  christos   return _bfd_elf_adjust_dynamic_copy (info, eh, sec);
   1805  1.11  christos }
   1806  1.11  christos 
   1807  1.11  christos /* If EH is undefined, make it dynamic if that makes sense.  */
   1808  1.11  christos 
   1809  1.11  christos static bfd_boolean
   1810  1.11  christos ensure_undef_dynamic (struct bfd_link_info *info,
   1811  1.11  christos 		      struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh)
   1812  1.11  christos {
   1813  1.11  christos   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   1814   1.1     skrll 
   1815  1.11  christos   if (htab->dynamic_sections_created
   1816  1.11  christos       && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   1817  1.11  christos 	  || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)
   1818  1.11  christos       && eh->dynindx == -1
   1819  1.11  christos       && !eh->forced_local
   1820  1.11  christos       && eh->type != STT_PARISC_MILLI
   1821  1.11  christos       && !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh)
   1822  1.11  christos       && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) == STV_DEFAULT)
   1823  1.11  christos     return bfd_elf_link_record_dynamic_symbol (info, eh);
   1824  1.11  christos   return TRUE;
   1825   1.1     skrll }
   1826   1.1     skrll 
   1827   1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in the .plt for entries that won't have relocations.
   1828   1.1     skrll    ie. plabel entries.  */
   1829   1.1     skrll 
   1830   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1831   1.1     skrll allocate_plt_static (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   1832   1.1     skrll {
   1833   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1834   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1835   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1836   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1837   1.1     skrll 
   1838   1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1839   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1840   1.1     skrll 
   1841   1.1     skrll   info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   1842   1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1843   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1844   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1845   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1846   1.3  christos 
   1847   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1848   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1849   1.1     skrll     {
   1850  1.11  christos       if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   1851  1.11  christos 	return FALSE;
   1852   1.1     skrll 
   1853   1.7  christos       if (WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1, bfd_link_pic (info), eh))
   1854   1.1     skrll 	{
   1855   1.1     skrll 	  /* Allocate these later.  From this point on, h->plabel
   1856   1.1     skrll 	     means that the plt entry is only used by a plabel.
   1857   1.1     skrll 	     We'll be using a normal plt entry for this symbol, so
   1858   1.1     skrll 	     clear the plabel indicator.  */
   1859   1.7  christos 
   1860   1.1     skrll 	  hh->plabel = 0;
   1861   1.1     skrll 	}
   1862   1.1     skrll       else if (hh->plabel)
   1863   1.1     skrll 	{
   1864   1.1     skrll 	  /* Make an entry in the .plt section for plabel references
   1865   1.1     skrll 	     that won't have a .plt entry for other reasons.  */
   1866  1.11  christos 	  sec = htab->etab.splt;
   1867   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   1868   1.1     skrll 	  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1869  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   1870  1.11  christos 	    htab->etab.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1871   1.1     skrll 	}
   1872   1.1     skrll       else
   1873   1.1     skrll 	{
   1874   1.1     skrll 	  /* No .plt entry needed.  */
   1875   1.1     skrll 	  eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1876   1.1     skrll 	  eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1877   1.1     skrll 	}
   1878   1.1     skrll     }
   1879   1.1     skrll   else
   1880   1.1     skrll     {
   1881   1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1882   1.1     skrll       eh->needs_plt = 0;
   1883   1.1     skrll     }
   1884   1.1     skrll 
   1885   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   1886   1.1     skrll }
   1887   1.1     skrll 
   1888  1.11  christos /* Calculate size of GOT entries for symbol given its TLS_TYPE.  */
   1889  1.11  christos 
   1890  1.11  christos static inline unsigned int
   1891  1.11  christos got_entries_needed (int tls_type)
   1892  1.11  christos {
   1893  1.11  christos   unsigned int need = 0;
   1894  1.11  christos 
   1895  1.11  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0)
   1896  1.11  christos     need += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1897  1.11  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) != 0)
   1898  1.11  christos     need += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2;
   1899  1.11  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE) != 0)
   1900  1.11  christos     need += GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1901  1.11  christos   return need;
   1902  1.11  christos }
   1903  1.11  christos 
   1904  1.11  christos /* Calculate size of relocs needed for symbol given its TLS_TYPE and
   1905  1.12  christos    NEEDed GOT entries.  TPREL_KNOWN says a TPREL offset can be
   1906  1.12  christos    calculated at link time.  DTPREL_KNOWN says the same for a DTPREL
   1907  1.12  christos    offset.  */
   1908  1.11  christos 
   1909  1.11  christos static inline unsigned int
   1910  1.12  christos got_relocs_needed (int tls_type, unsigned int need,
   1911  1.12  christos 		   bfd_boolean dtprel_known, bfd_boolean tprel_known)
   1912  1.11  christos {
   1913  1.11  christos   /* All the entries we allocated need relocs.
   1914  1.12  christos      Except for GD and IE with local symbols.  */
   1915  1.12  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD) != 0 && dtprel_known)
   1916  1.12  christos     need -= GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1917  1.12  christos   if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE) != 0 && tprel_known)
   1918  1.11  christos     need -= GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1919  1.11  christos   return need * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela) / GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1920  1.11  christos }
   1921  1.11  christos 
   1922   1.1     skrll /* Allocate space in .plt, .got and associated reloc sections for
   1923   1.1     skrll    global syms.  */
   1924   1.1     skrll 
   1925   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   1926   1.1     skrll allocate_dynrelocs (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   1927   1.1     skrll {
   1928   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_info *info;
   1929   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   1930   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   1931   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   1932  1.11  christos   struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   1933   1.1     skrll 
   1934   1.1     skrll   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   1935   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1936   1.1     skrll 
   1937   1.1     skrll   info = inf;
   1938   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   1939   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   1940   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   1941   1.3  christos 
   1942   1.1     skrll   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   1943   1.7  christos 
   1944   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1945   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   1946   1.1     skrll       && !hh->plabel
   1947   1.1     skrll       && eh->plt.refcount > 0)
   1948   1.1     skrll     {
   1949   1.1     skrll       /* Make an entry in the .plt section.  */
   1950  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.splt;
   1951   1.1     skrll       eh->plt.offset = sec->size;
   1952   1.1     skrll       sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   1953   1.1     skrll 
   1954   1.1     skrll       /* We also need to make an entry in the .rela.plt section.  */
   1955  1.11  christos       htab->etab.srelplt->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   1956   1.1     skrll       htab->need_plt_stub = 1;
   1957   1.1     skrll     }
   1958   1.1     skrll 
   1959   1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.refcount > 0)
   1960   1.1     skrll     {
   1961  1.11  christos       unsigned int need;
   1962  1.11  christos 
   1963  1.11  christos       if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   1964  1.11  christos 	return FALSE;
   1965   1.1     skrll 
   1966  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sgot;
   1967   1.1     skrll       eh->got.offset = sec->size;
   1968  1.11  christos       need = got_entries_needed (hh->tls_type);
   1969  1.11  christos       sec->size += need;
   1970   1.1     skrll       if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   1971  1.12  christos 	  && (bfd_link_dll (info)
   1972  1.12  christos 	      || (bfd_link_pic (info) && (hh->tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0)
   1973   1.1     skrll 	      || (eh->dynindx != -1
   1974  1.11  christos 		  && !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, eh)))
   1975  1.11  christos 	  && !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh))
   1976   1.1     skrll 	{
   1977  1.12  christos 	  bfd_boolean local = SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, eh);
   1978  1.11  christos 	  htab->etab.srelgot->size
   1979  1.12  christos 	    += got_relocs_needed (hh->tls_type, need, local,
   1980  1.12  christos 				  local && bfd_link_executable (info));
   1981   1.1     skrll 	}
   1982   1.1     skrll     }
   1983   1.1     skrll   else
   1984   1.1     skrll     eh->got.offset = (bfd_vma) -1;
   1985   1.1     skrll 
   1986  1.11  christos   /* If no dynamic sections we can't have dynamic relocs.  */
   1987  1.11  christos   if (!htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   1988  1.11  christos     hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1989  1.11  christos 
   1990  1.11  christos   /* Discard relocs on undefined syms with non-default visibility.  */
   1991  1.11  christos   else if ((eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined
   1992  1.11  christos 	    && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) != STV_DEFAULT)
   1993  1.11  christos 	   || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh))
   1994  1.11  christos     hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   1995  1.11  christos 
   1996   1.1     skrll   if (hh->dyn_relocs == NULL)
   1997   1.1     skrll     return TRUE;
   1998   1.1     skrll 
   1999   1.1     skrll   /* If this is a -Bsymbolic shared link, then we need to discard all
   2000   1.1     skrll      space allocated for dynamic pc-relative relocs against symbols
   2001   1.1     skrll      defined in a regular object.  For the normal shared case, discard
   2002   1.1     skrll      space for relocs that have become local due to symbol visibility
   2003   1.1     skrll      changes.  */
   2004   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2005   1.1     skrll     {
   2006   1.1     skrll #if RELATIVE_DYNRELOCS
   2007   1.1     skrll       if (SYMBOL_CALLS_LOCAL (info, eh))
   2008   1.1     skrll 	{
   2009  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs **hdh_pp;
   2010   1.1     skrll 
   2011   1.1     skrll 	  for (hdh_pp = &hh->dyn_relocs; (hdh_p = *hdh_pp) != NULL; )
   2012   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2013  1.11  christos 	      hdh_p->count -= hdh_p->pc_count;
   2014  1.11  christos 	      hdh_p->pc_count = 0;
   2015   1.1     skrll 	      if (hdh_p->count == 0)
   2016  1.11  christos 		*hdh_pp = hdh_p->next;
   2017   1.1     skrll 	      else
   2018  1.11  christos 		hdh_pp = &hdh_p->next;
   2019   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2020   1.1     skrll 	}
   2021   1.1     skrll #endif
   2022   1.1     skrll 
   2023  1.11  christos       if (hh->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   2024   1.1     skrll 	{
   2025  1.11  christos 	  if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   2026  1.11  christos 	    return FALSE;
   2027   1.1     skrll 	}
   2028   1.1     skrll     }
   2029  1.11  christos   else if (ELIMINATE_COPY_RELOCS)
   2030   1.1     skrll     {
   2031   1.1     skrll       /* For the non-shared case, discard space for relocs against
   2032   1.1     skrll 	 symbols which turn out to need copy relocs or are not
   2033   1.1     skrll 	 dynamic.  */
   2034   1.7  christos 
   2035  1.11  christos       if (eh->dynamic_adjusted
   2036  1.11  christos 	  && !eh->def_regular
   2037  1.11  christos 	  && !ELF_COMMON_DEF_P (eh))
   2038  1.11  christos 	{
   2039  1.11  christos 	  if (!ensure_undef_dynamic (info, eh))
   2040  1.11  christos 	    return FALSE;
   2041   1.1     skrll 
   2042  1.11  christos 	  if (eh->dynindx == -1)
   2043  1.11  christos 	    hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2044   1.1     skrll 	}
   2045  1.11  christos       else
   2046  1.11  christos 	hh->dyn_relocs = NULL;
   2047   1.1     skrll     }
   2048   1.1     skrll 
   2049   1.1     skrll   /* Finally, allocate space.  */
   2050  1.11  christos   for (hdh_p = hh->dyn_relocs; hdh_p != NULL; hdh_p = hdh_p->next)
   2051   1.1     skrll     {
   2052   1.1     skrll       asection *sreloc = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2053   1.1     skrll       sreloc->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2054   1.1     skrll     }
   2055   1.1     skrll 
   2056   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2057   1.1     skrll }
   2058   1.1     skrll 
   2059   1.1     skrll /* This function is called via elf_link_hash_traverse to force
   2060   1.1     skrll    millicode symbols local so they do not end up as globals in the
   2061   1.1     skrll    dynamic symbol table.  We ought to be able to do this in
   2062   1.1     skrll    adjust_dynamic_symbol, but our adjust_dynamic_symbol is not called
   2063   1.1     skrll    for all dynamic symbols.  Arguably, this is a bug in
   2064   1.1     skrll    elf_adjust_dynamic_symbol.  */
   2065   1.1     skrll 
   2066   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2067   1.1     skrll clobber_millicode_symbols (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   2068   1.1     skrll 			   struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2069   1.1     skrll {
   2070   1.1     skrll   if (eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI
   2071   1.1     skrll       && !eh->forced_local)
   2072   1.1     skrll     {
   2073   1.1     skrll       elf32_hppa_hide_symbol (info, eh, TRUE);
   2074   1.1     skrll     }
   2075   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2076   1.1     skrll }
   2077   1.1     skrll 
   2078  1.11  christos /* Set DF_TEXTREL if we find any dynamic relocs that apply to
   2079  1.11  christos    read-only sections.  */
   2080   1.1     skrll 
   2081   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2082  1.11  christos maybe_set_textrel (struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh, void *inf)
   2083   1.1     skrll {
   2084  1.11  christos   asection *sec;
   2085  1.11  christos 
   2086  1.11  christos   if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect)
   2087  1.11  christos     return TRUE;
   2088   1.1     skrll 
   2089  1.11  christos   sec = readonly_dynrelocs (eh);
   2090  1.11  christos   if (sec != NULL)
   2091   1.1     skrll     {
   2092  1.11  christos       struct bfd_link_info *info = (struct bfd_link_info *) inf;
   2093   1.1     skrll 
   2094  1.11  christos       info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2095  1.11  christos       info->callbacks->minfo
   2096  1.12  christos 	(_("%pB: dynamic relocation against `%pT' in read-only section `%pA'\n"),
   2097  1.11  christos 	 sec->owner, eh->root.root.string, sec);
   2098  1.11  christos       /* Not an error, just cut short the traversal.  */
   2099  1.11  christos       return FALSE;
   2100   1.1     skrll     }
   2101   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2102   1.1     skrll }
   2103   1.1     skrll 
   2104   1.1     skrll /* Set the sizes of the dynamic sections.  */
   2105   1.1     skrll 
   2106   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   2107   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   2108   1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2109   1.1     skrll {
   2110   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   2111   1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   2112   1.1     skrll   bfd *ibfd;
   2113   1.1     skrll   asection *sec;
   2114   1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean relocs;
   2115   1.1     skrll 
   2116   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2117   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2118   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2119   1.3  christos 
   2120   1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   2121   1.1     skrll   if (dynobj == NULL)
   2122   1.1     skrll     abort ();
   2123   1.1     skrll 
   2124   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2125   1.1     skrll     {
   2126   1.1     skrll       /* Set the contents of the .interp section to the interpreter.  */
   2127   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info) && !info->nointerp)
   2128   1.1     skrll 	{
   2129   1.6  christos 	  sec = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".interp");
   2130   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec == NULL)
   2131   1.1     skrll 	    abort ();
   2132   1.1     skrll 	  sec->size = sizeof ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2133   1.1     skrll 	  sec->contents = (unsigned char *) ELF_DYNAMIC_INTERPRETER;
   2134   1.1     skrll 	}
   2135   1.1     skrll 
   2136   1.1     skrll       /* Force millicode symbols local.  */
   2137   1.1     skrll       elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab,
   2138   1.1     skrll 			      clobber_millicode_symbols,
   2139   1.1     skrll 			      info);
   2140   1.1     skrll     }
   2141   1.1     skrll 
   2142   1.1     skrll   /* Set up .got and .plt offsets for local syms, and space for local
   2143   1.1     skrll      dynamic relocs.  */
   2144   1.7  christos   for (ibfd = info->input_bfds; ibfd != NULL; ibfd = ibfd->link.next)
   2145   1.1     skrll     {
   2146   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_got;
   2147   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_got;
   2148   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *local_plt;
   2149   1.1     skrll       bfd_signed_vma *end_local_plt;
   2150   1.1     skrll       bfd_size_type locsymcount;
   2151   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2152   1.1     skrll       asection *srel;
   2153   1.1     skrll       char *local_tls_type;
   2154   1.1     skrll 
   2155   1.1     skrll       if (bfd_get_flavour (ibfd) != bfd_target_elf_flavour)
   2156   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2157   1.1     skrll 
   2158   1.1     skrll       for (sec = ibfd->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2159   1.1     skrll 	{
   2160  1.11  christos 	  struct elf_dyn_relocs *hdh_p;
   2161   1.1     skrll 
   2162  1.11  christos 	  for (hdh_p = ((struct elf_dyn_relocs *)
   2163   1.1     skrll 		    elf_section_data (sec)->local_dynrel);
   2164   1.1     skrll 	       hdh_p != NULL;
   2165  1.11  christos 	       hdh_p = hdh_p->next)
   2166   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2167   1.1     skrll 	      if (!bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec)
   2168   1.1     skrll 		  && bfd_is_abs_section (hdh_p->sec->output_section))
   2169   1.1     skrll 		{
   2170   1.1     skrll 		  /* Input section has been discarded, either because
   2171   1.1     skrll 		     it is a copy of a linkonce section or due to
   2172   1.1     skrll 		     linker script /DISCARD/, so we'll be discarding
   2173   1.1     skrll 		     the relocs too.  */
   2174   1.1     skrll 		}
   2175   1.1     skrll 	      else if (hdh_p->count != 0)
   2176   1.1     skrll 		{
   2177   1.1     skrll 		  srel = elf_section_data (hdh_p->sec)->sreloc;
   2178   1.1     skrll 		  srel->size += hdh_p->count * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2179   1.1     skrll 		  if ((hdh_p->sec->output_section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   2180   1.1     skrll 		    info->flags |= DF_TEXTREL;
   2181   1.1     skrll 		}
   2182   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2183   1.1     skrll 	}
   2184   1.1     skrll 
   2185   1.1     skrll       local_got = elf_local_got_refcounts (ibfd);
   2186   1.1     skrll       if (!local_got)
   2187   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2188   1.1     skrll 
   2189   1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (ibfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2190   1.1     skrll       locsymcount = symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2191   1.1     skrll       end_local_got = local_got + locsymcount;
   2192   1.1     skrll       local_tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (ibfd);
   2193  1.11  christos       sec = htab->etab.sgot;
   2194  1.11  christos       srel = htab->etab.srelgot;
   2195   1.1     skrll       for (; local_got < end_local_got; ++local_got)
   2196   1.1     skrll 	{
   2197   1.1     skrll 	  if (*local_got > 0)
   2198   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2199  1.11  christos 	      unsigned int need;
   2200  1.11  christos 
   2201   1.1     skrll 	      *local_got = sec->size;
   2202  1.11  christos 	      need = got_entries_needed (*local_tls_type);
   2203  1.11  christos 	      sec->size += need;
   2204  1.12  christos 	      if (bfd_link_dll (info)
   2205  1.12  christos 		  || (bfd_link_pic (info)
   2206  1.12  christos 		      && (*local_tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0))
   2207  1.12  christos 		htab->etab.srelgot->size
   2208  1.12  christos 		  += got_relocs_needed (*local_tls_type, need, TRUE,
   2209  1.12  christos 					bfd_link_executable (info));
   2210   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2211   1.1     skrll 	  else
   2212   1.1     skrll 	    *local_got = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2213   1.1     skrll 
   2214   1.1     skrll 	  ++local_tls_type;
   2215   1.1     skrll 	}
   2216   1.1     skrll 
   2217   1.1     skrll       local_plt = end_local_got;
   2218   1.1     skrll       end_local_plt = local_plt + locsymcount;
   2219   1.1     skrll       if (! htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2220   1.1     skrll 	{
   2221   1.1     skrll 	  /* Won't be used, but be safe.  */
   2222   1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2223   1.1     skrll 	    *local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2224   1.1     skrll 	}
   2225   1.1     skrll       else
   2226   1.1     skrll 	{
   2227  1.11  christos 	  sec = htab->etab.splt;
   2228  1.11  christos 	  srel = htab->etab.srelplt;
   2229   1.1     skrll 	  for (; local_plt < end_local_plt; ++local_plt)
   2230   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2231   1.1     skrll 	      if (*local_plt > 0)
   2232   1.1     skrll 		{
   2233   1.1     skrll 		  *local_plt = sec->size;
   2234   1.1     skrll 		  sec->size += PLT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   2235   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2236   1.1     skrll 		    srel->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2237   1.1     skrll 		}
   2238   1.1     skrll 	      else
   2239   1.1     skrll 		*local_plt = (bfd_vma) -1;
   2240   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2241   1.1     skrll 	}
   2242   1.1     skrll     }
   2243   1.7  christos 
   2244   1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_ldm_got.refcount > 0)
   2245   1.1     skrll     {
   2246   1.7  christos       /* Allocate 2 got entries and 1 dynamic reloc for
   2247  1.11  christos 	 R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32 relocs.  */
   2248  1.11  christos       htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = htab->etab.sgot->size;
   2249  1.11  christos       htab->etab.sgot->size += (GOT_ENTRY_SIZE * 2);
   2250  1.11  christos       htab->etab.srelgot->size += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   2251   1.1     skrll     }
   2252   1.1     skrll   else
   2253   1.1     skrll     htab->tls_ldm_got.offset = -1;
   2254   1.1     skrll 
   2255   1.1     skrll   /* Do all the .plt entries without relocs first.  The dynamic linker
   2256   1.1     skrll      uses the last .plt reloc to find the end of the .plt (and hence
   2257   1.1     skrll      the start of the .got) for lazy linking.  */
   2258   1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_plt_static, info);
   2259   1.1     skrll 
   2260   1.1     skrll   /* Allocate global sym .plt and .got entries, and space for global
   2261   1.1     skrll      sym dynamic relocs.  */
   2262   1.1     skrll   elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, allocate_dynrelocs, info);
   2263   1.1     skrll 
   2264   1.1     skrll   /* The check_relocs and adjust_dynamic_symbol entry points have
   2265   1.1     skrll      determined the sizes of the various dynamic sections.  Allocate
   2266   1.1     skrll      memory for them.  */
   2267   1.1     skrll   relocs = FALSE;
   2268   1.1     skrll   for (sec = dynobj->sections; sec != NULL; sec = sec->next)
   2269   1.1     skrll     {
   2270   1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   2271   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2272   1.1     skrll 
   2273  1.11  christos       if (sec == htab->etab.splt)
   2274   1.1     skrll 	{
   2275   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   2276   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2277   1.1     skrll 	      /* Make space for the plt stub at the end of the .plt
   2278   1.1     skrll 		 section.  We want this stub right at the end, up
   2279   1.1     skrll 		 against the .got section.  */
   2280  1.13  christos 	      int gotalign = bfd_section_alignment (htab->etab.sgot);
   2281  1.13  christos 	      int pltalign = bfd_section_alignment (sec);
   2282  1.13  christos 	      int align = gotalign > 3 ? gotalign : 3;
   2283   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_size_type mask;
   2284   1.1     skrll 
   2285  1.13  christos 	      if (align > pltalign)
   2286  1.13  christos 		bfd_set_section_alignment (sec, align);
   2287   1.1     skrll 	      mask = ((bfd_size_type) 1 << gotalign) - 1;
   2288   1.1     skrll 	      sec->size = (sec->size + sizeof (plt_stub) + mask) & ~mask;
   2289   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2290   1.1     skrll 	}
   2291  1.11  christos       else if (sec == htab->etab.sgot
   2292  1.11  christos 	       || sec == htab->etab.sdynbss
   2293  1.11  christos 	       || sec == htab->etab.sdynrelro)
   2294   1.1     skrll 	;
   2295  1.13  christos       else if (CONST_STRNEQ (bfd_section_name (sec), ".rela"))
   2296   1.1     skrll 	{
   2297   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec->size != 0)
   2298   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2299   1.1     skrll 	      /* Remember whether there are any reloc sections other
   2300   1.1     skrll 		 than .rela.plt.  */
   2301  1.11  christos 	      if (sec != htab->etab.srelplt)
   2302   1.1     skrll 		relocs = TRUE;
   2303   1.1     skrll 
   2304   1.1     skrll 	      /* We use the reloc_count field as a counter if we need
   2305   1.1     skrll 		 to copy relocs into the output file.  */
   2306   1.1     skrll 	      sec->reloc_count = 0;
   2307   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2308   1.1     skrll 	}
   2309   1.1     skrll       else
   2310   1.1     skrll 	{
   2311   1.1     skrll 	  /* It's not one of our sections, so don't allocate space.  */
   2312   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2313   1.1     skrll 	}
   2314   1.1     skrll 
   2315   1.1     skrll       if (sec->size == 0)
   2316   1.1     skrll 	{
   2317   1.1     skrll 	  /* If we don't need this section, strip it from the
   2318   1.1     skrll 	     output file.  This is mostly to handle .rela.bss and
   2319   1.1     skrll 	     .rela.plt.  We must create both sections in
   2320   1.1     skrll 	     create_dynamic_sections, because they must be created
   2321   1.1     skrll 	     before the linker maps input sections to output
   2322   1.1     skrll 	     sections.  The linker does that before
   2323   1.1     skrll 	     adjust_dynamic_symbol is called, and it is that
   2324   1.1     skrll 	     function which decides whether anything needs to go
   2325   1.1     skrll 	     into these sections.  */
   2326   1.1     skrll 	  sec->flags |= SEC_EXCLUDE;
   2327   1.1     skrll 	  continue;
   2328   1.1     skrll 	}
   2329   1.1     skrll 
   2330   1.1     skrll       if ((sec->flags & SEC_HAS_CONTENTS) == 0)
   2331   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2332   1.1     skrll 
   2333   1.1     skrll       /* Allocate memory for the section contents.  Zero it, because
   2334   1.1     skrll 	 we may not fill in all the reloc sections.  */
   2335   1.1     skrll       sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (dynobj, sec->size);
   2336   1.1     skrll       if (sec->contents == NULL)
   2337   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   2338   1.1     skrll     }
   2339   1.1     skrll 
   2340   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   2341   1.1     skrll     {
   2342   1.1     skrll       /* Like IA-64 and HPPA64, always create a DT_PLTGOT.  It
   2343   1.1     skrll 	 actually has nothing to do with the PLT, it is how we
   2344   1.1     skrll 	 communicate the LTP value of a load module to the dynamic
   2345   1.1     skrll 	 linker.  */
   2346   1.1     skrll #define add_dynamic_entry(TAG, VAL) \
   2347   1.1     skrll   _bfd_elf_add_dynamic_entry (info, TAG, VAL)
   2348   1.1     skrll 
   2349   1.1     skrll       if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTGOT, 0))
   2350   1.1     skrll 	return FALSE;
   2351   1.1     skrll 
   2352   1.1     skrll       /* Add some entries to the .dynamic section.  We fill in the
   2353   1.1     skrll 	 values later, in elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections, but we
   2354   1.1     skrll 	 must add the entries now so that we get the correct size for
   2355   1.1     skrll 	 the .dynamic section.  The DT_DEBUG entry is filled in by the
   2356   1.1     skrll 	 dynamic linker and used by the debugger.  */
   2357   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_executable (info))
   2358   1.1     skrll 	{
   2359   1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_DEBUG, 0))
   2360   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2361   1.1     skrll 	}
   2362   1.1     skrll 
   2363  1.11  christos       if (htab->etab.srelplt->size != 0)
   2364   1.1     skrll 	{
   2365   1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTRELSZ, 0)
   2366   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_PLTREL, DT_RELA)
   2367   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_JMPREL, 0))
   2368   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2369   1.1     skrll 	}
   2370   1.1     skrll 
   2371   1.1     skrll       if (relocs)
   2372   1.1     skrll 	{
   2373   1.1     skrll 	  if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELA, 0)
   2374   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELASZ, 0)
   2375   1.1     skrll 	      || !add_dynamic_entry (DT_RELAENT, sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela)))
   2376   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   2377   1.1     skrll 
   2378   1.1     skrll 	  /* If any dynamic relocs apply to a read-only section,
   2379   1.1     skrll 	     then we need a DT_TEXTREL entry.  */
   2380   1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) == 0)
   2381  1.11  christos 	    elf_link_hash_traverse (&htab->etab, maybe_set_textrel, info);
   2382   1.1     skrll 
   2383   1.1     skrll 	  if ((info->flags & DF_TEXTREL) != 0)
   2384   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2385   1.1     skrll 	      if (!add_dynamic_entry (DT_TEXTREL, 0))
   2386   1.1     skrll 		return FALSE;
   2387   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2388   1.1     skrll 	}
   2389   1.1     skrll     }
   2390   1.1     skrll #undef add_dynamic_entry
   2391   1.1     skrll 
   2392   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2393   1.1     skrll }
   2394   1.1     skrll 
   2395   1.1     skrll /* External entry points for sizing and building linker stubs.  */
   2396   1.1     skrll 
   2397   1.1     skrll /* Set up various things so that we can make a list of input sections
   2398   1.1     skrll    for each output section included in the link.  Returns -1 on error,
   2399   1.1     skrll    0 when no stubs will be needed, and 1 on success.  */
   2400   1.1     skrll 
   2401   1.1     skrll int
   2402   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_setup_section_lists (bfd *output_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2403   1.1     skrll {
   2404   1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd;
   2405   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_count;
   2406   1.7  christos   unsigned int top_id, top_index;
   2407   1.1     skrll   asection *section;
   2408   1.1     skrll   asection **input_list, **list;
   2409   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt;
   2410   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2411   1.1     skrll 
   2412   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2413   1.3  christos     return -1;
   2414   1.3  christos 
   2415   1.1     skrll   /* Count the number of input BFDs and find the top input section id.  */
   2416   1.1     skrll   for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_count = 0, top_id = 0;
   2417   1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2418   1.7  christos        input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next)
   2419   1.1     skrll     {
   2420   1.1     skrll       bfd_count += 1;
   2421   1.1     skrll       for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2422   1.1     skrll 	   section != NULL;
   2423   1.1     skrll 	   section = section->next)
   2424   1.1     skrll 	{
   2425   1.1     skrll 	  if (top_id < section->id)
   2426   1.1     skrll 	    top_id = section->id;
   2427   1.1     skrll 	}
   2428   1.1     skrll     }
   2429   1.1     skrll   htab->bfd_count = bfd_count;
   2430   1.1     skrll 
   2431   1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (struct map_stub) * (top_id + 1);
   2432   1.1     skrll   htab->stub_group = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2433   1.1     skrll   if (htab->stub_group == NULL)
   2434   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2435   1.1     skrll 
   2436   1.1     skrll   /* We can't use output_bfd->section_count here to find the top output
   2437   1.1     skrll      section index as some sections may have been removed, and
   2438   1.1     skrll      strip_excluded_output_sections doesn't renumber the indices.  */
   2439   1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections, top_index = 0;
   2440   1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2441   1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2442   1.1     skrll     {
   2443   1.1     skrll       if (top_index < section->index)
   2444   1.1     skrll 	top_index = section->index;
   2445   1.1     skrll     }
   2446   1.1     skrll 
   2447   1.1     skrll   htab->top_index = top_index;
   2448   1.1     skrll   amt = sizeof (asection *) * (top_index + 1);
   2449   1.1     skrll   input_list = bfd_malloc (amt);
   2450   1.1     skrll   htab->input_list = input_list;
   2451   1.1     skrll   if (input_list == NULL)
   2452   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2453   1.1     skrll 
   2454   1.1     skrll   /* For sections we aren't interested in, mark their entries with a
   2455   1.1     skrll      value we can check later.  */
   2456   1.1     skrll   list = input_list + top_index;
   2457   1.1     skrll   do
   2458   1.1     skrll     *list = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   2459   1.1     skrll   while (list-- != input_list);
   2460   1.1     skrll 
   2461   1.1     skrll   for (section = output_bfd->sections;
   2462   1.1     skrll        section != NULL;
   2463   1.1     skrll        section = section->next)
   2464   1.1     skrll     {
   2465   1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   2466   1.1     skrll 	input_list[section->index] = NULL;
   2467   1.1     skrll     }
   2468   1.1     skrll 
   2469   1.1     skrll   return 1;
   2470   1.1     skrll }
   2471   1.1     skrll 
   2472   1.1     skrll /* The linker repeatedly calls this function for each input section,
   2473   1.1     skrll    in the order that input sections are linked into output sections.
   2474   1.1     skrll    Build lists of input sections to determine groupings between which
   2475   1.1     skrll    we may insert linker stubs.  */
   2476   1.1     skrll 
   2477   1.1     skrll void
   2478   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_next_input_section (struct bfd_link_info *info, asection *isec)
   2479   1.1     skrll {
   2480   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2481   1.1     skrll 
   2482   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2483   1.3  christos     return;
   2484   1.3  christos 
   2485   1.1     skrll   if (isec->output_section->index <= htab->top_index)
   2486   1.1     skrll     {
   2487   1.1     skrll       asection **list = htab->input_list + isec->output_section->index;
   2488   1.1     skrll       if (*list != bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2489   1.1     skrll 	{
   2490   1.1     skrll 	  /* Steal the link_sec pointer for our list.  */
   2491   1.1     skrll #define PREV_SEC(sec) (htab->stub_group[(sec)->id].link_sec)
   2492   1.1     skrll 	  /* This happens to make the list in reverse order,
   2493   1.1     skrll 	     which is what we want.  */
   2494   1.1     skrll 	  PREV_SEC (isec) = *list;
   2495   1.1     skrll 	  *list = isec;
   2496   1.1     skrll 	}
   2497   1.1     skrll     }
   2498   1.1     skrll }
   2499   1.1     skrll 
   2500   1.1     skrll /* See whether we can group stub sections together.  Grouping stub
   2501   1.1     skrll    sections may result in fewer stubs.  More importantly, we need to
   2502   1.1     skrll    put all .init* and .fini* stubs at the beginning of the .init or
   2503   1.1     skrll    .fini output sections respectively, because glibc splits the
   2504   1.1     skrll    _init and _fini functions into multiple parts.  Putting a stub in
   2505   1.1     skrll    the middle of a function is not a good idea.  */
   2506   1.1     skrll 
   2507   1.1     skrll static void
   2508   1.1     skrll group_sections (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   2509   1.1     skrll 		bfd_size_type stub_group_size,
   2510   1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean stubs_always_before_branch)
   2511   1.1     skrll {
   2512   1.1     skrll   asection **list = htab->input_list + htab->top_index;
   2513   1.1     skrll   do
   2514   1.1     skrll     {
   2515   1.1     skrll       asection *tail = *list;
   2516   1.1     skrll       if (tail == bfd_abs_section_ptr)
   2517   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2518   1.1     skrll       while (tail != NULL)
   2519   1.1     skrll 	{
   2520   1.1     skrll 	  asection *curr;
   2521   1.1     skrll 	  asection *prev;
   2522   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_size_type total;
   2523   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_boolean big_sec;
   2524   1.1     skrll 
   2525   1.1     skrll 	  curr = tail;
   2526   1.1     skrll 	  total = tail->size;
   2527   1.1     skrll 	  big_sec = total >= stub_group_size;
   2528   1.1     skrll 
   2529   1.1     skrll 	  while ((prev = PREV_SEC (curr)) != NULL
   2530   1.1     skrll 		 && ((total += curr->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2531   1.1     skrll 		     < stub_group_size))
   2532   1.1     skrll 	    curr = prev;
   2533   1.1     skrll 
   2534   1.1     skrll 	  /* OK, the size from the start of CURR to the end is less
   2535   1.1     skrll 	     than 240000 bytes and thus can be handled by one stub
   2536   1.1     skrll 	     section.  (or the tail section is itself larger than
   2537   1.1     skrll 	     240000 bytes, in which case we may be toast.)
   2538   1.1     skrll 	     We should really be keeping track of the total size of
   2539   1.1     skrll 	     stubs added here, as stubs contribute to the final output
   2540   1.1     skrll 	     section size.  That's a little tricky, and this way will
   2541   1.1     skrll 	     only break if stubs added total more than 22144 bytes, or
   2542   1.1     skrll 	     2768 long branch stubs.  It seems unlikely for more than
   2543   1.1     skrll 	     2768 different functions to be called, especially from
   2544   1.1     skrll 	     code only 240000 bytes long.  This limit used to be
   2545   1.1     skrll 	     250000, but c++ code tends to generate lots of little
   2546   1.1     skrll 	     functions, and sometimes violated the assumption.  */
   2547   1.1     skrll 	  do
   2548   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2549   1.1     skrll 	      prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2550   1.1     skrll 	      /* Set up this stub group.  */
   2551   1.1     skrll 	      htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2552   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2553   1.1     skrll 	  while (tail != curr && (tail = prev) != NULL);
   2554   1.1     skrll 
   2555   1.1     skrll 	  /* But wait, there's more!  Input sections up to 240000
   2556   1.1     skrll 	     bytes before the stub section can be handled by it too.
   2557   1.1     skrll 	     Don't do this if we have a really large section after the
   2558   1.1     skrll 	     stubs, as adding more stubs increases the chance that
   2559   1.1     skrll 	     branches may not reach into the stub section.  */
   2560   1.1     skrll 	  if (!stubs_always_before_branch && !big_sec)
   2561   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2562   1.1     skrll 	      total = 0;
   2563   1.1     skrll 	      while (prev != NULL
   2564   1.1     skrll 		     && ((total += tail->output_offset - prev->output_offset)
   2565   1.1     skrll 			 < stub_group_size))
   2566   1.1     skrll 		{
   2567   1.1     skrll 		  tail = prev;
   2568   1.1     skrll 		  prev = PREV_SEC (tail);
   2569   1.1     skrll 		  htab->stub_group[tail->id].link_sec = curr;
   2570   1.1     skrll 		}
   2571   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2572   1.1     skrll 	  tail = prev;
   2573   1.1     skrll 	}
   2574   1.1     skrll     }
   2575   1.1     skrll   while (list-- != htab->input_list);
   2576   1.1     skrll   free (htab->input_list);
   2577   1.1     skrll #undef PREV_SEC
   2578   1.1     skrll }
   2579   1.1     skrll 
   2580   1.1     skrll /* Read in all local syms for all input bfds, and create hash entries
   2581   1.1     skrll    for export stubs if we are building a multi-subspace shared lib.
   2582   1.1     skrll    Returns -1 on error, 1 if export stubs created, 0 otherwise.  */
   2583   1.1     skrll 
   2584   1.1     skrll static int
   2585   1.1     skrll get_local_syms (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *input_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   2586   1.1     skrll {
   2587   1.1     skrll   unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2588   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms, **all_local_syms;
   2589   1.1     skrll   int stub_changed = 0;
   2590   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2591   1.1     skrll 
   2592   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2593   1.3  christos     return -1;
   2594   1.3  christos 
   2595   1.1     skrll   /* We want to read in symbol extension records only once.  To do this
   2596   1.1     skrll      we need to read in the local symbols in parallel and save them for
   2597   1.1     skrll      later use; so hold pointers to the local symbols in an array.  */
   2598   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type amt = sizeof (Elf_Internal_Sym *) * htab->bfd_count;
   2599   1.1     skrll   all_local_syms = bfd_zmalloc (amt);
   2600   1.1     skrll   htab->all_local_syms = all_local_syms;
   2601   1.1     skrll   if (all_local_syms == NULL)
   2602   1.1     skrll     return -1;
   2603   1.1     skrll 
   2604   1.1     skrll   /* Walk over all the input BFDs, swapping in local symbols.
   2605   1.1     skrll      If we are creating a shared library, create hash entries for the
   2606   1.1     skrll      export stubs.  */
   2607   1.1     skrll   for (bfd_indx = 0;
   2608   1.1     skrll        input_bfd != NULL;
   2609   1.7  christos        input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next, bfd_indx++)
   2610   1.1     skrll     {
   2611   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2612   1.1     skrll 
   2613   1.1     skrll       /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2614   1.1     skrll       symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2615   1.1     skrll       if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2616   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   2617   1.1     skrll 
   2618   1.1     skrll       /* We need an array of the local symbols attached to the input bfd.  */
   2619   1.1     skrll       local_syms = (Elf_Internal_Sym *) symtab_hdr->contents;
   2620   1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2621   1.1     skrll 	{
   2622   1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = bfd_elf_get_elf_syms (input_bfd, symtab_hdr,
   2623   1.1     skrll 					     symtab_hdr->sh_info, 0,
   2624   1.1     skrll 					     NULL, NULL, NULL);
   2625   1.1     skrll 	  /* Cache them for elf_link_input_bfd.  */
   2626   1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr->contents = (unsigned char *) local_syms;
   2627   1.1     skrll 	}
   2628   1.1     skrll       if (local_syms == NULL)
   2629   1.1     skrll 	return -1;
   2630   1.1     skrll 
   2631   1.1     skrll       all_local_syms[bfd_indx] = local_syms;
   2632   1.1     skrll 
   2633   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_pic (info) && htab->multi_subspace)
   2634   1.1     skrll 	{
   2635   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_syms;
   2636   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **eh_symend;
   2637   1.1     skrll 	  unsigned int symcount;
   2638   1.1     skrll 
   2639   1.1     skrll 	  symcount = (symtab_hdr->sh_size / sizeof (Elf32_External_Sym)
   2640   1.1     skrll 		      - symtab_hdr->sh_info);
   2641   1.1     skrll 	  eh_syms = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   2642   1.1     skrll 	  eh_symend = (struct elf_link_hash_entry **) (eh_syms + symcount);
   2643   1.1     skrll 
   2644   1.1     skrll 	  /* Look through the global syms for functions;  We need to
   2645   1.1     skrll 	     build export stubs for all globally visible functions.  */
   2646   1.1     skrll 	  for (; eh_syms < eh_symend; eh_syms++)
   2647   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2648   1.1     skrll 	      struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2649   1.1     skrll 
   2650   1.1     skrll 	      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (*eh_syms);
   2651   1.1     skrll 
   2652   1.1     skrll 	      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   2653   1.1     skrll 		     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2654   1.1     skrll 		   hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   2655   1.1     skrll 
   2656   1.1     skrll 	      /* At this point in the link, undefined syms have been
   2657   1.1     skrll 		 resolved, so we need to check that the symbol was
   2658   1.1     skrll 		 defined in this BFD.  */
   2659   1.1     skrll 	      if ((hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2660   1.1     skrll 		   || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   2661   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.type == STT_FUNC
   2662   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL
   2663   1.1     skrll 		  && (hh->eh.root.u.def.section->output_section->owner
   2664   1.1     skrll 		      == output_bfd)
   2665   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.root.u.def.section->owner == input_bfd
   2666   1.1     skrll 		  && hh->eh.def_regular
   2667   1.1     skrll 		  && !hh->eh.forced_local
   2668   1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other) == STV_DEFAULT)
   2669   1.1     skrll 		{
   2670   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sec;
   2671   1.1     skrll 		  const char *stub_name;
   2672   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2673   1.1     skrll 
   2674   1.1     skrll 		  sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2675   1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hh_name (hh);
   2676   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   2677   1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   2678   1.1     skrll 						      FALSE, FALSE);
   2679   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   2680   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2681   1.1     skrll 		      hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, sec, htab);
   2682   1.1     skrll 		      if (!hsh)
   2683   1.1     skrll 			return -1;
   2684   1.1     skrll 
   2685   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   2686   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->target_section = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2687   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_export;
   2688   1.1     skrll 		      hsh->hh = hh;
   2689   1.1     skrll 		      stub_changed = 1;
   2690   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2691   1.1     skrll 		  else
   2692   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2693  1.11  christos 		      /* xgettext:c-format */
   2694  1.12  christos 		      _bfd_error_handler (_("%pB: duplicate export stub %s"),
   2695  1.11  christos 					  input_bfd, stub_name);
   2696   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2697   1.1     skrll 		}
   2698   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2699   1.1     skrll 	}
   2700   1.1     skrll     }
   2701   1.1     skrll 
   2702   1.1     skrll   return stub_changed;
   2703   1.1     skrll }
   2704   1.1     skrll 
   2705   1.1     skrll /* Determine and set the size of the stub section for a final link.
   2706   1.1     skrll 
   2707   1.1     skrll    The basic idea here is to examine all the relocations looking for
   2708   1.1     skrll    PC-relative calls to a target that is unreachable with a "bl"
   2709   1.1     skrll    instruction.  */
   2710   1.1     skrll 
   2711   1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   2712   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_size_stubs
   2713   1.1     skrll   (bfd *output_bfd, bfd *stub_bfd, struct bfd_link_info *info,
   2714   1.1     skrll    bfd_boolean multi_subspace, bfd_signed_vma group_size,
   2715   1.1     skrll    asection * (*add_stub_section) (const char *, asection *),
   2716   1.1     skrll    void (*layout_sections_again) (void))
   2717   1.1     skrll {
   2718   1.1     skrll   bfd_size_type stub_group_size;
   2719   1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean stubs_always_before_branch;
   2720   1.1     skrll   bfd_boolean stub_changed;
   2721   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   2722   1.1     skrll 
   2723   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   2724   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   2725   1.3  christos 
   2726   1.1     skrll   /* Stash our params away.  */
   2727   1.1     skrll   htab->stub_bfd = stub_bfd;
   2728   1.1     skrll   htab->multi_subspace = multi_subspace;
   2729   1.1     skrll   htab->add_stub_section = add_stub_section;
   2730   1.1     skrll   htab->layout_sections_again = layout_sections_again;
   2731   1.1     skrll   stubs_always_before_branch = group_size < 0;
   2732   1.1     skrll   if (group_size < 0)
   2733   1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = -group_size;
   2734   1.1     skrll   else
   2735   1.1     skrll     stub_group_size = group_size;
   2736   1.1     skrll   if (stub_group_size == 1)
   2737   1.1     skrll     {
   2738   1.1     skrll       /* Default values.  */
   2739   1.1     skrll       if (stubs_always_before_branch)
   2740   1.1     skrll 	{
   2741   1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 7680000;
   2742   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2743   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 240000;
   2744   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2745   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 7500;
   2746   1.1     skrll 	}
   2747   1.1     skrll       else
   2748   1.1     skrll 	{
   2749   1.1     skrll 	  stub_group_size = 6971392;
   2750   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_17bit_branch || htab->multi_subspace)
   2751   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 217856;
   2752   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->has_12bit_branch)
   2753   1.1     skrll 	    stub_group_size = 6808;
   2754   1.1     skrll 	}
   2755   1.1     skrll     }
   2756   1.1     skrll 
   2757   1.1     skrll   group_sections (htab, stub_group_size, stubs_always_before_branch);
   2758   1.1     skrll 
   2759   1.1     skrll   switch (get_local_syms (output_bfd, info->input_bfds, info))
   2760   1.1     skrll     {
   2761   1.1     skrll     default:
   2762   1.1     skrll       if (htab->all_local_syms)
   2763   1.1     skrll 	goto error_ret_free_local;
   2764   1.1     skrll       return FALSE;
   2765   1.1     skrll 
   2766   1.1     skrll     case 0:
   2767   1.1     skrll       stub_changed = FALSE;
   2768   1.1     skrll       break;
   2769   1.1     skrll 
   2770   1.1     skrll     case 1:
   2771   1.1     skrll       stub_changed = TRUE;
   2772   1.1     skrll       break;
   2773   1.1     skrll     }
   2774   1.1     skrll 
   2775   1.1     skrll   while (1)
   2776   1.1     skrll     {
   2777   1.1     skrll       bfd *input_bfd;
   2778   1.1     skrll       unsigned int bfd_indx;
   2779   1.1     skrll       asection *stub_sec;
   2780   1.1     skrll 
   2781   1.1     skrll       for (input_bfd = info->input_bfds, bfd_indx = 0;
   2782   1.1     skrll 	   input_bfd != NULL;
   2783   1.7  christos 	   input_bfd = input_bfd->link.next, bfd_indx++)
   2784   1.1     skrll 	{
   2785   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   2786   1.1     skrll 	  asection *section;
   2787   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms;
   2788   1.1     skrll 
   2789   1.1     skrll 	  /* We'll need the symbol table in a second.  */
   2790   1.1     skrll 	  symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   2791   1.1     skrll 	  if (symtab_hdr->sh_info == 0)
   2792   1.1     skrll 	    continue;
   2793   1.1     skrll 
   2794   1.1     skrll 	  local_syms = htab->all_local_syms[bfd_indx];
   2795   1.1     skrll 
   2796   1.1     skrll 	  /* Walk over each section attached to the input bfd.  */
   2797   1.1     skrll 	  for (section = input_bfd->sections;
   2798   1.1     skrll 	       section != NULL;
   2799   1.1     skrll 	       section = section->next)
   2800   1.1     skrll 	    {
   2801   1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela *internal_relocs, *irelaend, *irela;
   2802   1.1     skrll 
   2803   1.1     skrll 	      /* If there aren't any relocs, then there's nothing more
   2804   1.1     skrll 		 to do.  */
   2805   1.1     skrll 	      if ((section->flags & SEC_RELOC) == 0
   2806  1.12  christos 		  || (section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0
   2807  1.12  christos 		  || (section->flags & SEC_LOAD) == 0
   2808  1.12  christos 		  || (section->flags & SEC_CODE) == 0
   2809   1.1     skrll 		  || section->reloc_count == 0)
   2810   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2811   1.1     skrll 
   2812   1.1     skrll 	      /* If this section is a link-once section that will be
   2813   1.1     skrll 		 discarded, then don't create any stubs.  */
   2814   1.1     skrll 	      if (section->output_section == NULL
   2815   1.1     skrll 		  || section->output_section->owner != output_bfd)
   2816   1.1     skrll 		continue;
   2817   1.1     skrll 
   2818   1.1     skrll 	      /* Get the relocs.  */
   2819   1.1     skrll 	      internal_relocs
   2820   1.1     skrll 		= _bfd_elf_link_read_relocs (input_bfd, section, NULL, NULL,
   2821   1.1     skrll 					     info->keep_memory);
   2822   1.1     skrll 	      if (internal_relocs == NULL)
   2823   1.1     skrll 		goto error_ret_free_local;
   2824   1.1     skrll 
   2825   1.1     skrll 	      /* Now examine each relocation.  */
   2826   1.1     skrll 	      irela = internal_relocs;
   2827   1.1     skrll 	      irelaend = irela + section->reloc_count;
   2828   1.1     skrll 	      for (; irela < irelaend; irela++)
   2829   1.1     skrll 		{
   2830   1.1     skrll 		  unsigned int r_type, r_indx;
   2831   1.1     skrll 		  enum elf32_hppa_stub_type stub_type;
   2832   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh;
   2833   1.1     skrll 		  asection *sym_sec;
   2834   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma sym_value;
   2835   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma destination;
   2836   1.1     skrll 		  struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   2837   1.1     skrll 		  char *stub_name;
   2838   1.1     skrll 		  const asection *id_sec;
   2839   1.1     skrll 
   2840   1.1     skrll 		  r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (irela->r_info);
   2841   1.1     skrll 		  r_indx = ELF32_R_SYM (irela->r_info);
   2842   1.1     skrll 
   2843   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   2844   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2845   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2846   1.1     skrll 		    error_ret_free_internal:
   2847   1.1     skrll 		      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   2848   1.1     skrll 			free (internal_relocs);
   2849   1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_local;
   2850   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2851   1.1     skrll 
   2852   1.1     skrll 		  /* Only look for stubs on call instructions.  */
   2853   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F
   2854   1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F
   2855   1.1     skrll 		      && r_type != (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL22F)
   2856   1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   2857   1.1     skrll 
   2858   1.1     skrll 		  /* Now determine the call target, its name, value,
   2859   1.1     skrll 		     section.  */
   2860   1.1     skrll 		  sym_sec = NULL;
   2861   1.1     skrll 		  sym_value = 0;
   2862  1.12  christos 		  destination = -1;
   2863   1.1     skrll 		  hh = NULL;
   2864   1.1     skrll 		  if (r_indx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   2865   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2866   1.1     skrll 		      /* It's a local symbol.  */
   2867   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   2868   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Shdr *hdr;
   2869   1.1     skrll 		      unsigned int shndx;
   2870   1.1     skrll 
   2871   1.1     skrll 		      sym = local_syms + r_indx;
   2872   1.1     skrll 		      if (ELF_ST_TYPE (sym->st_info) != STT_SECTION)
   2873   1.1     skrll 			sym_value = sym->st_value;
   2874   1.1     skrll 		      shndx = sym->st_shndx;
   2875   1.1     skrll 		      if (shndx < elf_numsections (input_bfd))
   2876   1.1     skrll 			{
   2877   1.1     skrll 			  hdr = elf_elfsections (input_bfd)[shndx];
   2878   1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hdr->bfd_section;
   2879   1.1     skrll 			  destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   2880   1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_offset
   2881   1.1     skrll 					 + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   2882   1.1     skrll 			}
   2883   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2884   1.1     skrll 		  else
   2885   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2886   1.1     skrll 		      /* It's an external symbol.  */
   2887   1.1     skrll 		      int e_indx;
   2888   1.1     skrll 
   2889   1.1     skrll 		      e_indx = r_indx - symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   2890   1.1     skrll 		      hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd)[e_indx]);
   2891   1.1     skrll 
   2892   1.1     skrll 		      while (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_indirect
   2893   1.1     skrll 			     || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_warning)
   2894   1.1     skrll 			hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (hh->eh.root.u.i.link);
   2895   1.1     skrll 
   2896   1.1     skrll 		      if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   2897   1.1     skrll 			  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   2898   1.1     skrll 			{
   2899   1.1     skrll 			  sym_sec = hh->eh.root.u.def.section;
   2900   1.1     skrll 			  sym_value = hh->eh.root.u.def.value;
   2901   1.1     skrll 			  if (sym_sec->output_section != NULL)
   2902   1.1     skrll 			    destination = (sym_value + irela->r_addend
   2903   1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_offset
   2904   1.1     skrll 					   + sym_sec->output_section->vma);
   2905   1.1     skrll 			}
   2906   1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   2907   1.1     skrll 			{
   2908   1.7  christos 			  if (! bfd_link_pic (info))
   2909   1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   2910   1.1     skrll 			}
   2911   1.1     skrll 		      else if (hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefined)
   2912   1.1     skrll 			{
   2913   1.1     skrll 			  if (! (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   2914   1.1     skrll 				 && (ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (hh->eh.other)
   2915   1.1     skrll 				     == STV_DEFAULT)
   2916   1.1     skrll 				 && hh->eh.type != STT_PARISC_MILLI))
   2917   1.1     skrll 			    continue;
   2918   1.1     skrll 			}
   2919   1.1     skrll 		      else
   2920   1.1     skrll 			{
   2921   1.1     skrll 			  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   2922   1.1     skrll 			  goto error_ret_free_internal;
   2923   1.1     skrll 			}
   2924   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2925   1.1     skrll 
   2926   1.1     skrll 		  /* Determine what (if any) linker stub is needed.  */
   2927   1.1     skrll 		  stub_type = hppa_type_of_stub (section, irela, hh,
   2928   1.1     skrll 						 destination, info);
   2929   1.1     skrll 		  if (stub_type == hppa_stub_none)
   2930   1.1     skrll 		    continue;
   2931   1.1     skrll 
   2932   1.1     skrll 		  /* Support for grouping stub sections.  */
   2933   1.1     skrll 		  id_sec = htab->stub_group[section->id].link_sec;
   2934   1.1     skrll 
   2935   1.1     skrll 		  /* Get the name of this stub.  */
   2936   1.1     skrll 		  stub_name = hppa_stub_name (id_sec, sym_sec, hh, irela);
   2937   1.1     skrll 		  if (!stub_name)
   2938   1.1     skrll 		    goto error_ret_free_internal;
   2939   1.1     skrll 
   2940   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_stub_hash_lookup (&htab->bstab,
   2941   1.1     skrll 						      stub_name,
   2942   1.1     skrll 						      FALSE, FALSE);
   2943   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh != NULL)
   2944   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2945   1.1     skrll 		      /* The proper stub has already been created.  */
   2946   1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   2947   1.1     skrll 		      continue;
   2948   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2949   1.1     skrll 
   2950   1.1     skrll 		  hsh = hppa_add_stub (stub_name, section, htab);
   2951   1.1     skrll 		  if (hsh == NULL)
   2952   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2953   1.1     skrll 		      free (stub_name);
   2954   1.1     skrll 		      goto error_ret_free_internal;
   2955   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2956   1.1     skrll 
   2957   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_value = sym_value;
   2958   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->target_section = sym_sec;
   2959   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->stub_type = stub_type;
   2960   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   2961   1.1     skrll 		    {
   2962   1.1     skrll 		      if (stub_type == hppa_stub_import)
   2963   1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_import_shared;
   2964   1.1     skrll 		      else if (stub_type == hppa_stub_long_branch)
   2965   1.1     skrll 			hsh->stub_type = hppa_stub_long_branch_shared;
   2966   1.1     skrll 		    }
   2967   1.1     skrll 		  hsh->hh = hh;
   2968   1.1     skrll 		  stub_changed = TRUE;
   2969   1.1     skrll 		}
   2970   1.1     skrll 
   2971   1.1     skrll 	      /* We're done with the internal relocs, free them.  */
   2972   1.1     skrll 	      if (elf_section_data (section)->relocs == NULL)
   2973   1.1     skrll 		free (internal_relocs);
   2974   1.1     skrll 	    }
   2975   1.1     skrll 	}
   2976   1.1     skrll 
   2977   1.1     skrll       if (!stub_changed)
   2978   1.1     skrll 	break;
   2979   1.1     skrll 
   2980   1.1     skrll       /* OK, we've added some stubs.  Find out the new size of the
   2981   1.1     skrll 	 stub sections.  */
   2982   1.1     skrll       for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   2983   1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec != NULL;
   2984   1.1     skrll 	   stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   2985  1.10  christos 	if ((stub_sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0)
   2986  1.10  christos 	  stub_sec->size = 0;
   2987   1.1     skrll 
   2988   1.1     skrll       bfd_hash_traverse (&htab->bstab, hppa_size_one_stub, htab);
   2989   1.1     skrll 
   2990   1.1     skrll       /* Ask the linker to do its stuff.  */
   2991   1.1     skrll       (*htab->layout_sections_again) ();
   2992   1.1     skrll       stub_changed = FALSE;
   2993   1.1     skrll     }
   2994   1.1     skrll 
   2995   1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   2996   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   2997   1.1     skrll 
   2998   1.1     skrll  error_ret_free_local:
   2999   1.1     skrll   free (htab->all_local_syms);
   3000   1.1     skrll   return FALSE;
   3001   1.1     skrll }
   3002   1.1     skrll 
   3003   1.1     skrll /* For a final link, this function is called after we have sized the
   3004   1.1     skrll    stubs to provide a value for __gp.  */
   3005   1.1     skrll 
   3006   1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   3007   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_set_gp (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3008   1.1     skrll {
   3009   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_link_hash_entry *h;
   3010   1.1     skrll   asection *sec = NULL;
   3011   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma gp_val = 0;
   3012   1.1     skrll 
   3013  1.11  christos   h = bfd_link_hash_lookup (info->hash, "$global$", FALSE, FALSE, FALSE);
   3014   1.1     skrll 
   3015   1.1     skrll   if (h != NULL
   3016   1.1     skrll       && (h->type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   3017   1.1     skrll 	  || h->type == bfd_link_hash_defweak))
   3018   1.1     skrll     {
   3019   1.1     skrll       gp_val = h->u.def.value;
   3020   1.1     skrll       sec = h->u.def.section;
   3021   1.1     skrll     }
   3022   1.1     skrll   else
   3023   1.1     skrll     {
   3024   1.1     skrll       asection *splt = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".plt");
   3025   1.1     skrll       asection *sgot = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".got");
   3026   1.1     skrll 
   3027   1.1     skrll       /* Choose to point our LTP at, in this order, one of .plt, .got,
   3028   1.1     skrll 	 or .data, if these sections exist.  In the case of choosing
   3029   1.1     skrll 	 .plt try to make the LTP ideal for addressing anywhere in the
   3030   1.1     skrll 	 .plt or .got with a 14 bit signed offset.  Typically, the end
   3031   1.1     skrll 	 of the .plt is the start of the .got, so choose .plt + 0x2000
   3032   1.1     skrll 	 if either the .plt or .got is larger than 0x2000.  If both
   3033   1.1     skrll 	 the .plt and .got are smaller than 0x2000, choose the end of
   3034   1.1     skrll 	 the .plt section.  */
   3035   1.1     skrll       sec = strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") == 0
   3036   1.1     skrll 	  ? NULL : splt;
   3037   1.1     skrll       if (sec != NULL)
   3038   1.1     skrll 	{
   3039   1.1     skrll 	  gp_val = sec->size;
   3040   1.1     skrll 	  if (gp_val > 0x2000 || (sgot && sgot->size > 0x2000))
   3041   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3042   1.1     skrll 	      gp_val = 0x2000;
   3043   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3044   1.1     skrll 	}
   3045   1.1     skrll       else
   3046   1.1     skrll 	{
   3047   1.1     skrll 	  sec = sgot;
   3048   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   3049   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3050   1.1     skrll 	      if (strcmp (bfd_get_target (abfd), "elf32-hppa-netbsd") != 0)
   3051   1.1     skrll 		{
   3052  1.11  christos 		  /* We know we don't have a .plt.  If .got is large,
   3053   1.1     skrll 		     offset our LTP.  */
   3054  1.11  christos 		  if (sec->size > 0x2000)
   3055   1.1     skrll 		    gp_val = 0x2000;
   3056   1.1     skrll 		}
   3057   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3058   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3059   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3060   1.1     skrll 	      /* No .plt or .got.  Who cares what the LTP is?  */
   3061   1.1     skrll 	      sec = bfd_get_section_by_name (abfd, ".data");
   3062   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3063   1.1     skrll 	}
   3064   1.1     skrll 
   3065   1.1     skrll       if (h != NULL)
   3066   1.1     skrll 	{
   3067   1.1     skrll 	  h->type = bfd_link_hash_defined;
   3068   1.1     skrll 	  h->u.def.value = gp_val;
   3069   1.1     skrll 	  if (sec != NULL)
   3070   1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = sec;
   3071   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3072   1.1     skrll 	    h->u.def.section = bfd_abs_section_ptr;
   3073   1.1     skrll 	}
   3074   1.1     skrll     }
   3075   1.1     skrll 
   3076  1.11  christos   if (bfd_get_flavour (abfd) == bfd_target_elf_flavour)
   3077  1.11  christos     {
   3078  1.11  christos       if (sec != NULL && sec->output_section != NULL)
   3079  1.11  christos 	gp_val += sec->output_section->vma + sec->output_offset;
   3080   1.1     skrll 
   3081  1.11  christos       elf_gp (abfd) = gp_val;
   3082  1.11  christos     }
   3083   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3084   1.1     skrll }
   3085   1.1     skrll 
   3086   1.1     skrll /* Build all the stubs associated with the current output file.  The
   3087   1.1     skrll    stubs are kept in a hash table attached to the main linker hash
   3088   1.1     skrll    table.  We also set up the .plt entries for statically linked PIC
   3089   1.1     skrll    functions here.  This function is called via hppaelf_finish in the
   3090   1.1     skrll    linker.  */
   3091   1.1     skrll 
   3092   1.1     skrll bfd_boolean
   3093   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_build_stubs (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3094   1.1     skrll {
   3095   1.1     skrll   asection *stub_sec;
   3096   1.1     skrll   struct bfd_hash_table *table;
   3097   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3098   1.1     skrll 
   3099   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3100   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3101   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3102   1.1     skrll 
   3103   1.1     skrll   for (stub_sec = htab->stub_bfd->sections;
   3104   1.1     skrll        stub_sec != NULL;
   3105   1.1     skrll        stub_sec = stub_sec->next)
   3106  1.10  christos     if ((stub_sec->flags & SEC_LINKER_CREATED) == 0
   3107  1.10  christos 	&& stub_sec->size != 0)
   3108  1.10  christos       {
   3109  1.10  christos 	/* Allocate memory to hold the linker stubs.  */
   3110  1.10  christos 	stub_sec->contents = bfd_zalloc (htab->stub_bfd, stub_sec->size);
   3111  1.10  christos 	if (stub_sec->contents == NULL)
   3112  1.10  christos 	  return FALSE;
   3113  1.10  christos 	stub_sec->size = 0;
   3114  1.10  christos       }
   3115   1.1     skrll 
   3116   1.1     skrll   /* Build the stubs as directed by the stub hash table.  */
   3117   1.1     skrll   table = &htab->bstab;
   3118   1.1     skrll   bfd_hash_traverse (table, hppa_build_one_stub, info);
   3119   1.1     skrll 
   3120   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   3121   1.1     skrll }
   3122   1.1     skrll 
   3123   1.1     skrll /* Return the base vma address which should be subtracted from the real
   3124   1.7  christos    address when resolving a dtpoff relocation.
   3125   1.1     skrll    This is PT_TLS segment p_vaddr.  */
   3126   1.1     skrll 
   3127   1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3128   1.1     skrll dtpoff_base (struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3129   1.1     skrll {
   3130   1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3131   1.1     skrll   if (elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec == NULL)
   3132   1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3133   1.1     skrll   return elf_hash_table (info)->tls_sec->vma;
   3134   1.1     skrll }
   3135   1.1     skrll 
   3136   1.1     skrll /* Return the relocation value for R_PARISC_TLS_TPOFF*..  */
   3137   1.1     skrll 
   3138   1.1     skrll static bfd_vma
   3139   1.1     skrll tpoff (struct bfd_link_info *info, bfd_vma address)
   3140   1.1     skrll {
   3141   1.1     skrll   struct elf_link_hash_table *htab = elf_hash_table (info);
   3142   1.1     skrll 
   3143   1.1     skrll   /* If tls_sec is NULL, we should have signalled an error already.  */
   3144   1.1     skrll   if (htab->tls_sec == NULL)
   3145   1.1     skrll     return 0;
   3146   1.7  christos   /* hppa TLS ABI is variant I and static TLS block start just after
   3147   1.1     skrll      tcbhead structure which has 2 pointer fields.  */
   3148   1.7  christos   return (address - htab->tls_sec->vma
   3149   1.1     skrll 	  + align_power ((bfd_vma) 8, htab->tls_sec->alignment_power));
   3150   1.1     skrll }
   3151   1.1     skrll 
   3152   1.1     skrll /* Perform a final link.  */
   3153   1.1     skrll 
   3154   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3155   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_final_link (bfd *abfd, struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3156   1.1     skrll {
   3157   1.9  christos   struct stat buf;
   3158   1.9  christos 
   3159   1.1     skrll   /* Invoke the regular ELF linker to do all the work.  */
   3160   1.1     skrll   if (!bfd_elf_final_link (abfd, info))
   3161   1.1     skrll     return FALSE;
   3162   1.1     skrll 
   3163   1.1     skrll   /* If we're producing a final executable, sort the contents of the
   3164   1.1     skrll      unwind section.  */
   3165   1.7  christos   if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   3166   1.3  christos     return TRUE;
   3167   1.3  christos 
   3168   1.9  christos   /* Do not attempt to sort non-regular files.  This is here
   3169   1.9  christos      especially for configure scripts and kernel builds which run
   3170   1.9  christos      tests with "ld [...] -o /dev/null".  */
   3171   1.9  christos   if (stat (abfd->filename, &buf) != 0
   3172   1.9  christos       || !S_ISREG(buf.st_mode))
   3173   1.9  christos     return TRUE;
   3174   1.9  christos 
   3175   1.1     skrll   return elf_hppa_sort_unwind (abfd);
   3176   1.1     skrll }
   3177   1.1     skrll 
   3178   1.1     skrll /* Record the lowest address for the data and text segments.  */
   3179   1.1     skrll 
   3180   1.1     skrll static void
   3181   1.1     skrll hppa_record_segment_addr (bfd *abfd, asection *section, void *data)
   3182   1.1     skrll {
   3183   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3184   1.1     skrll 
   3185   1.1     skrll   htab = (struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table*) data;
   3186   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3187   1.3  christos     return;
   3188   1.1     skrll 
   3189   1.1     skrll   if ((section->flags & (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD)) == (SEC_ALLOC | SEC_LOAD))
   3190   1.1     skrll     {
   3191   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   3192   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Phdr *p;
   3193   1.1     skrll 
   3194   1.1     skrll       p = _bfd_elf_find_segment_containing_section (abfd, section->output_section);
   3195   1.1     skrll       BFD_ASSERT (p != NULL);
   3196   1.1     skrll       value = p->p_vaddr;
   3197   1.1     skrll 
   3198   1.1     skrll       if ((section->flags & SEC_READONLY) != 0)
   3199   1.1     skrll 	{
   3200   1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->text_segment_base)
   3201   1.1     skrll 	    htab->text_segment_base = value;
   3202   1.1     skrll 	}
   3203   1.1     skrll       else
   3204   1.1     skrll 	{
   3205   1.1     skrll 	  if (value < htab->data_segment_base)
   3206   1.1     skrll 	    htab->data_segment_base = value;
   3207   1.1     skrll 	}
   3208   1.1     skrll     }
   3209   1.1     skrll }
   3210   1.1     skrll 
   3211   1.1     skrll /* Perform a relocation as part of a final link.  */
   3212   1.1     skrll 
   3213   1.1     skrll static bfd_reloc_status_type
   3214   1.1     skrll final_link_relocate (asection *input_section,
   3215   1.1     skrll 		     bfd_byte *contents,
   3216   1.1     skrll 		     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela,
   3217   1.1     skrll 		     bfd_vma value,
   3218   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab,
   3219   1.1     skrll 		     asection *sym_sec,
   3220   1.1     skrll 		     struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh,
   3221   1.1     skrll 		     struct bfd_link_info *info)
   3222   1.1     skrll {
   3223  1.13  christos   unsigned int insn;
   3224   1.1     skrll   unsigned int r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3225   1.1     skrll   unsigned int orig_r_type = r_type;
   3226   1.1     skrll   reloc_howto_type *howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   3227   1.1     skrll   int r_format = howto->bitsize;
   3228   1.1     skrll   enum hppa_reloc_field_selector_type_alt r_field;
   3229   1.1     skrll   bfd *input_bfd = input_section->owner;
   3230   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma offset = rela->r_offset;
   3231   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma max_branch_offset = 0;
   3232   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *hit_data = contents + offset;
   3233   1.1     skrll   bfd_signed_vma addend = rela->r_addend;
   3234   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma location;
   3235   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_stub_hash_entry *hsh = NULL;
   3236   1.7  christos   int val;
   3237   1.1     skrll 
   3238   1.1     skrll   if (r_type == R_PARISC_NONE)
   3239   1.1     skrll     return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3240   1.1     skrll 
   3241   1.1     skrll   insn = bfd_get_32 (input_bfd, hit_data);
   3242   1.1     skrll 
   3243   1.1     skrll   /* Find out where we are and where we're going.  */
   3244   1.1     skrll   location = (offset +
   3245   1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_offset +
   3246   1.1     skrll 	      input_section->output_section->vma);
   3247   1.1     skrll 
   3248   1.1     skrll   /* If we are not building a shared library, convert DLTIND relocs to
   3249   1.1     skrll      DPREL relocs.  */
   3250   1.7  christos   if (!bfd_link_pic (info))
   3251   1.1     skrll     {
   3252   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3253   1.1     skrll 	{
   3254   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3255   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3256   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3257   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3258   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL21L;
   3259   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3260   1.1     skrll 
   3261   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3262   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3263   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3264   1.5     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3265   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14R;
   3266   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3267   1.1     skrll 
   3268   1.1     skrll 	  case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3269   1.1     skrll 	    r_type = R_PARISC_DPREL14F;
   3270   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3271   1.1     skrll 	}
   3272   1.1     skrll     }
   3273   1.1     skrll 
   3274   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3275   1.1     skrll     {
   3276   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3277   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3278   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3279   1.1     skrll       /* If this call should go via the plt, find the import stub in
   3280   1.1     skrll 	 the stub hash.  */
   3281   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL
   3282   1.1     skrll 	  || sym_sec->output_section == NULL
   3283   1.1     skrll 	  || (hh != NULL
   3284   1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   3285   1.1     skrll 	      && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3286   1.1     skrll 	      && !hh->plabel
   3287   1.7  christos 	      && (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3288   1.1     skrll 		  || !hh->eh.def_regular
   3289   1.1     skrll 		  || hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   3290   1.1     skrll 	{
   3291   1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3292  1.12  christos 				     hh, rela, htab);
   3293   1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh != NULL)
   3294   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3295   1.1     skrll 	      value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3296   1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3297   1.1     skrll 		       + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma);
   3298   1.1     skrll 	      addend = 0;
   3299   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3300   1.1     skrll 	  else if (sym_sec == NULL && hh != NULL
   3301   1.1     skrll 		   && hh->eh.root.type == bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3302   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3303   1.1     skrll 	      /* It's OK if undefined weak.  Calls to undefined weak
   3304   1.1     skrll 		 symbols behave as if the "called" function
   3305   1.1     skrll 		 immediately returns.  We can thus call to a weak
   3306   1.1     skrll 		 function without first checking whether the function
   3307   1.1     skrll 		 is defined.  */
   3308   1.1     skrll 	      value = location;
   3309   1.1     skrll 	      addend = 8;
   3310   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3311   1.1     skrll 	  else
   3312   1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3313   1.1     skrll 	}
   3314   1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3315   1.1     skrll 
   3316   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3317   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3318   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3319   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3320   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3321   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3322   1.1     skrll       /* Make it a pc relative offset.  */
   3323   1.1     skrll       value -= location;
   3324   1.1     skrll       addend -= 8;
   3325   1.1     skrll       break;
   3326   1.1     skrll 
   3327   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3328   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3329   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3330   1.1     skrll       /* Convert instructions that use the linkage table pointer (r19) to
   3331   1.1     skrll 	 instructions that use the global data pointer (dp).  This is the
   3332   1.1     skrll 	 most efficient way of using PIC code in an incomplete executable,
   3333   1.1     skrll 	 but the user must follow the standard runtime conventions for
   3334   1.1     skrll 	 accessing data for this to work.  */
   3335   1.5     skrll       if (orig_r_type != r_type)
   3336   1.1     skrll 	{
   3337   1.5     skrll 	  if (r_type == R_PARISC_DPREL21L)
   3338   1.5     skrll 	    {
   3339   1.5     skrll 	      /* GCC sometimes uses a register other than r19 for the
   3340   1.5     skrll 		 operation, so we must convert any addil instruction
   3341   1.5     skrll 		 that uses this relocation.  */
   3342  1.13  christos 	      if ((insn & 0xfc000000) == OP_ADDIL << 26)
   3343   1.5     skrll 		insn = ADDIL_DP;
   3344   1.5     skrll 	      else
   3345   1.5     skrll 		/* We must have a ldil instruction.  It's too hard to find
   3346   1.5     skrll 		   and convert the associated add instruction, so issue an
   3347   1.5     skrll 		   error.  */
   3348  1.11  christos 		_bfd_error_handler
   3349  1.11  christos 		  /* xgettext:c-format */
   3350  1.12  christos 		  (_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): %s fixup for insn %#x "
   3351  1.12  christos 		     "is not supported in a non-shared link"),
   3352   1.5     skrll 		   input_bfd,
   3353   1.5     skrll 		   input_section,
   3354  1.12  christos 		   (uint64_t) offset,
   3355   1.5     skrll 		   howto->name,
   3356   1.5     skrll 		   insn);
   3357   1.5     skrll 	    }
   3358   1.5     skrll 	  else if (r_type == R_PARISC_DPREL14F)
   3359   1.5     skrll 	    {
   3360   1.5     skrll 	      /* This must be a format 1 load/store.  Change the base
   3361   1.5     skrll 		 register to dp.  */
   3362   1.5     skrll 	      insn = (insn & 0xfc1ffff) | (27 << 21);
   3363   1.5     skrll 	    }
   3364   1.5     skrll 	}
   3365   1.5     skrll 
   3366   1.5     skrll       /* For all the DP relative relocations, we need to examine the symbol's
   3367   1.5     skrll 	 section.  If it has no section or if it's a code section, then
   3368   1.5     skrll 	 "data pointer relative" makes no sense.  In that case we don't
   3369   1.5     skrll 	 adjust the "value", and for 21 bit addil instructions, we change the
   3370   1.5     skrll 	 source addend register from %dp to %r0.  This situation commonly
   3371   1.5     skrll 	 arises for undefined weak symbols and when a variable's "constness"
   3372   1.5     skrll 	 is declared differently from the way the variable is defined.  For
   3373   1.5     skrll 	 instance: "extern int foo" with foo defined as "const int foo".  */
   3374   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL || (sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3375   1.1     skrll 	{
   3376  1.13  christos 	  if ((insn & ((0x3fu << 26) | (0x1f << 21)))
   3377  1.13  christos 	      == ((OP_ADDIL << 26) | (27 << 21)))
   3378   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3379   1.1     skrll 	      insn &= ~ (0x1f << 21);
   3380   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3381   1.1     skrll 	  /* Now try to make things easy for the dynamic linker.  */
   3382   1.1     skrll 
   3383   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3384   1.1     skrll 	}
   3385   1.1     skrll       /* Fall thru.  */
   3386   1.1     skrll 
   3387   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3388   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3389   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3390   1.4     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3391   1.5     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3392   1.5     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3393   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3394   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3395   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3396   1.1     skrll       value -= elf_gp (input_section->output_section->owner);
   3397   1.1     skrll       break;
   3398   1.1     skrll 
   3399   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3400   1.1     skrll       if ((sym_sec->flags & SEC_CODE) != 0)
   3401   1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->text_segment_base;
   3402   1.1     skrll       else
   3403   1.1     skrll 	value -= htab->data_segment_base;
   3404   1.1     skrll       break;
   3405   1.1     skrll 
   3406   1.1     skrll     default:
   3407   1.1     skrll       break;
   3408   1.1     skrll     }
   3409   1.1     skrll 
   3410   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3411   1.1     skrll     {
   3412   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3413   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3414   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3415   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3416   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14F:
   3417   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL32:
   3418   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3419   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3420   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3421   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGBASE:
   3422   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3423   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   3424   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   3425   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   3426   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3427   1.1     skrll       break;
   3428   1.1     skrll 
   3429   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3430   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL21L:
   3431   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3432   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lsel;
   3433   1.1     skrll       break;
   3434   1.1     skrll 
   3435   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3436   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3437   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   3438   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3439   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   3440   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   3441   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   3442   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_lrsel;
   3443   1.1     skrll       break;
   3444   1.1     skrll 
   3445   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3446   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL14R:
   3447   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3448   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3449   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rsel;
   3450   1.1     skrll       break;
   3451   1.1     skrll 
   3452   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3453   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3454   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3455   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   3456   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3457   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   3458   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   3459   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   3460   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_rrsel;
   3461   1.1     skrll       break;
   3462   1.1     skrll 
   3463   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3464   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3465   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3466   1.1     skrll       r_field = e_fsel;
   3467   1.1     skrll 
   3468   1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL17F)
   3469   1.1     skrll 	{
   3470   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (17-1)) << 2;
   3471   1.1     skrll 	}
   3472   1.1     skrll       else if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_PCREL12F)
   3473   1.1     skrll 	{
   3474   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (12-1)) << 2;
   3475   1.1     skrll 	}
   3476   1.1     skrll       else
   3477   1.1     skrll 	{
   3478   1.1     skrll 	  max_branch_offset = (1 << (22-1)) << 2;
   3479   1.1     skrll 	}
   3480   1.1     skrll 
   3481   1.1     skrll       /* sym_sec is NULL on undefined weak syms or when shared on
   3482   1.1     skrll 	 undefined syms.  We've already checked for a stub for the
   3483   1.1     skrll 	 shared undefined case.  */
   3484   1.1     skrll       if (sym_sec == NULL)
   3485   1.1     skrll 	break;
   3486   1.1     skrll 
   3487   1.1     skrll       /* If the branch is out of reach, then redirect the
   3488   1.1     skrll 	 call to the local stub for this function.  */
   3489   1.1     skrll       if (value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3490   1.1     skrll 	{
   3491   1.1     skrll 	  hsh = hppa_get_stub_entry (input_section, sym_sec,
   3492  1.12  christos 				     hh, rela, htab);
   3493   1.1     skrll 	  if (hsh == NULL)
   3494   1.1     skrll 	    return bfd_reloc_undefined;
   3495   1.1     skrll 
   3496   1.1     skrll 	  /* Munge up the value and addend so that we call the stub
   3497   1.1     skrll 	     rather than the procedure directly.  */
   3498   1.1     skrll 	  value = (hsh->stub_offset
   3499   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_offset
   3500   1.1     skrll 		   + hsh->stub_sec->output_section->vma
   3501   1.1     skrll 		   - location);
   3502   1.1     skrll 	  addend = -8;
   3503   1.1     skrll 	}
   3504   1.1     skrll       break;
   3505   1.1     skrll 
   3506   1.1     skrll     /* Something we don't know how to handle.  */
   3507   1.1     skrll     default:
   3508   1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3509   1.1     skrll     }
   3510   1.1     skrll 
   3511   1.1     skrll   /* Make sure we can reach the stub.  */
   3512   1.1     skrll   if (max_branch_offset != 0
   3513   1.1     skrll       && value + addend + max_branch_offset >= 2*max_branch_offset)
   3514   1.1     skrll     {
   3515  1.11  christos       _bfd_error_handler
   3516  1.11  christos 	/* xgettext:c-format */
   3517  1.12  christos 	(_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): cannot reach %s, "
   3518  1.12  christos 	   "recompile with -ffunction-sections"),
   3519   1.1     skrll 	 input_bfd,
   3520   1.1     skrll 	 input_section,
   3521  1.12  christos 	 (uint64_t) offset,
   3522   1.1     skrll 	 hsh->bh_root.string);
   3523   1.1     skrll       bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3524   1.1     skrll       return bfd_reloc_notsupported;
   3525   1.1     skrll     }
   3526   1.1     skrll 
   3527   1.1     skrll   val = hppa_field_adjust (value, addend, r_field);
   3528   1.1     skrll 
   3529   1.1     skrll   switch (r_type)
   3530   1.1     skrll     {
   3531   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL12F:
   3532   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17C:
   3533   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17F:
   3534   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL17R:
   3535   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_PCREL22F:
   3536   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3537   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3538   1.1     skrll       /* This is a branch.  Divide the offset by four.
   3539   1.1     skrll 	 Note that we need to decide whether it's a branch or
   3540   1.1     skrll 	 otherwise by inspecting the reloc.  Inspecting insn won't
   3541   1.1     skrll 	 work as insn might be from a .word directive.  */
   3542   1.1     skrll       val >>= 2;
   3543   1.1     skrll       break;
   3544   1.1     skrll 
   3545   1.1     skrll     default:
   3546   1.1     skrll       break;
   3547   1.1     skrll     }
   3548   1.1     skrll 
   3549   1.1     skrll   insn = hppa_rebuild_insn (insn, val, r_format);
   3550   1.1     skrll 
   3551   1.1     skrll   /* Update the instruction word.  */
   3552   1.1     skrll   bfd_put_32 (input_bfd, (bfd_vma) insn, hit_data);
   3553   1.1     skrll   return bfd_reloc_ok;
   3554   1.1     skrll }
   3555   1.1     skrll 
   3556   1.1     skrll /* Relocate an HPPA ELF section.  */
   3557   1.1     skrll 
   3558   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   3559   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_relocate_section (bfd *output_bfd,
   3560   1.1     skrll 			     struct bfd_link_info *info,
   3561   1.1     skrll 			     bfd *input_bfd,
   3562   1.1     skrll 			     asection *input_section,
   3563   1.1     skrll 			     bfd_byte *contents,
   3564   1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Rela *relocs,
   3565   1.1     skrll 			     Elf_Internal_Sym *local_syms,
   3566   1.1     skrll 			     asection **local_sections)
   3567   1.1     skrll {
   3568   1.1     skrll   bfd_vma *local_got_offsets;
   3569   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   3570   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Shdr *symtab_hdr;
   3571   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *rela;
   3572   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela *relend;
   3573   1.1     skrll 
   3574   1.1     skrll   symtab_hdr = &elf_tdata (input_bfd)->symtab_hdr;
   3575   1.1     skrll 
   3576   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   3577   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   3578   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   3579   1.3  christos 
   3580   1.1     skrll   local_got_offsets = elf_local_got_offsets (input_bfd);
   3581   1.1     skrll 
   3582   1.1     skrll   rela = relocs;
   3583   1.1     skrll   relend = relocs + input_section->reloc_count;
   3584   1.1     skrll   for (; rela < relend; rela++)
   3585   1.1     skrll     {
   3586   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_type;
   3587   1.1     skrll       reloc_howto_type *howto;
   3588   1.1     skrll       unsigned int r_symndx;
   3589   1.1     skrll       struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_entry *hh;
   3590   1.1     skrll       Elf_Internal_Sym *sym;
   3591   1.1     skrll       asection *sym_sec;
   3592   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma relocation;
   3593   1.1     skrll       bfd_reloc_status_type rstatus;
   3594   1.1     skrll       const char *sym_name;
   3595   1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean plabel;
   3596   1.1     skrll       bfd_boolean warned_undef;
   3597   1.1     skrll 
   3598   1.1     skrll       r_type = ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info);
   3599   1.1     skrll       if (r_type >= (unsigned int) R_PARISC_UNIMPLEMENTED)
   3600   1.1     skrll 	{
   3601   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   3602   1.1     skrll 	  return FALSE;
   3603   1.1     skrll 	}
   3604   1.1     skrll       if (r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTENTRY
   3605   1.1     skrll 	  || r_type == (unsigned int) R_PARISC_GNU_VTINHERIT)
   3606   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3607   1.1     skrll 
   3608   1.1     skrll       r_symndx = ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info);
   3609   1.1     skrll       hh = NULL;
   3610   1.1     skrll       sym = NULL;
   3611   1.1     skrll       sym_sec = NULL;
   3612   1.1     skrll       warned_undef = FALSE;
   3613   1.1     skrll       if (r_symndx < symtab_hdr->sh_info)
   3614   1.1     skrll 	{
   3615   1.1     skrll 	  /* This is a local symbol, h defaults to NULL.  */
   3616   1.1     skrll 	  sym = local_syms + r_symndx;
   3617   1.1     skrll 	  sym_sec = local_sections[r_symndx];
   3618   1.1     skrll 	  relocation = _bfd_elf_rela_local_sym (output_bfd, sym, &sym_sec, rela);
   3619   1.1     skrll 	}
   3620   1.1     skrll       else
   3621   1.1     skrll 	{
   3622   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh;
   3623   1.7  christos 	  bfd_boolean unresolved_reloc, ignored;
   3624   1.1     skrll 	  struct elf_link_hash_entry **sym_hashes = elf_sym_hashes (input_bfd);
   3625   1.1     skrll 
   3626   1.1     skrll 	  RELOC_FOR_GLOBAL_SYMBOL (info, input_bfd, input_section, rela,
   3627   1.1     skrll 				   r_symndx, symtab_hdr, sym_hashes,
   3628   1.1     skrll 				   eh, sym_sec, relocation,
   3629   1.7  christos 				   unresolved_reloc, warned_undef,
   3630   1.7  christos 				   ignored);
   3631   1.1     skrll 
   3632   1.7  christos 	  if (!bfd_link_relocatable (info)
   3633   1.1     skrll 	      && relocation == 0
   3634   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defined
   3635   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_defweak
   3636   1.1     skrll 	      && eh->root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak)
   3637   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3638   1.1     skrll 	      if (info->unresolved_syms_in_objects == RM_IGNORE
   3639   1.1     skrll 		  && ELF_ST_VISIBILITY (eh->other) == STV_DEFAULT
   3640   1.1     skrll 		  && eh->type == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   3641   1.1     skrll 		{
   3642  1.10  christos 		  (*info->callbacks->undefined_symbol)
   3643  1.10  christos 		    (info, eh_name (eh), input_bfd,
   3644  1.10  christos 		     input_section, rela->r_offset, FALSE);
   3645   1.1     skrll 		  warned_undef = TRUE;
   3646   1.1     skrll 		}
   3647   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3648   1.1     skrll 	  hh = hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh);
   3649   1.1     skrll 	}
   3650   1.1     skrll 
   3651   1.6  christos       if (sym_sec != NULL && discarded_section (sym_sec))
   3652   1.3  christos 	RELOC_AGAINST_DISCARDED_SECTION (info, input_bfd, input_section,
   3653   1.6  christos 					 rela, 1, relend,
   3654   1.6  christos 					 elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type, 0,
   3655   1.3  christos 					 contents);
   3656   1.1     skrll 
   3657   1.7  christos       if (bfd_link_relocatable (info))
   3658   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   3659   1.1     skrll 
   3660   1.1     skrll       /* Do any required modifications to the relocation value, and
   3661   1.1     skrll 	 determine what types of dynamic info we need to output, if
   3662   1.1     skrll 	 any.  */
   3663   1.1     skrll       plabel = 0;
   3664   1.1     skrll       switch (r_type)
   3665   1.1     skrll 	{
   3666   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14F:
   3667   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND14R:
   3668   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DLTIND21L:
   3669   1.1     skrll 	  {
   3670   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   3671  1.11  christos 	    bfd_boolean do_got = FALSE;
   3672  1.11  christos 	    bfd_boolean reloc = bfd_link_pic (info);
   3673   1.1     skrll 
   3674   1.1     skrll 	    /* Relocation is to the entry for this symbol in the
   3675   1.1     skrll 	       global offset table.  */
   3676   1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   3677   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3678   1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean dyn;
   3679   1.1     skrll 
   3680   1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   3681   1.1     skrll 		dyn = htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created;
   3682  1.11  christos 		reloc = (!UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, &hh->eh)
   3683  1.11  christos 			 && (reloc
   3684  1.11  christos 			     || (hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3685  1.11  christos 				 && !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh))));
   3686  1.11  christos 		if (!reloc
   3687  1.11  christos 		    || !WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (dyn,
   3688  1.11  christos 							 bfd_link_pic (info),
   3689  1.11  christos 							 &hh->eh))
   3690   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3691   1.1     skrll 		    /* If we aren't going to call finish_dynamic_symbol,
   3692   1.1     skrll 		       then we need to handle initialisation of the .got
   3693   1.1     skrll 		       entry and create needed relocs here.  Since the
   3694   1.1     skrll 		       offset must always be a multiple of 4, we use the
   3695   1.1     skrll 		       least significant bit to record whether we have
   3696   1.1     skrll 		       initialised it already.  */
   3697   1.1     skrll 		    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3698   1.1     skrll 		      off &= ~1;
   3699   1.1     skrll 		    else
   3700   1.1     skrll 		      {
   3701   1.1     skrll 			hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   3702  1.11  christos 			do_got = TRUE;
   3703   1.1     skrll 		      }
   3704   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3705   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3706   1.1     skrll 	    else
   3707   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3708   1.1     skrll 		/* Local symbol case.  */
   3709   1.1     skrll 		if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3710   1.1     skrll 		  abort ();
   3711   1.1     skrll 
   3712   1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   3713   1.1     skrll 
   3714   1.1     skrll 		/* The offset must always be a multiple of 4.  We use
   3715   1.1     skrll 		   the least significant bit to record whether we have
   3716   1.1     skrll 		   already generated the necessary reloc.  */
   3717   1.1     skrll 		if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3718   1.1     skrll 		  off &= ~1;
   3719   1.1     skrll 		else
   3720   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3721   1.1     skrll 		    local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3722  1.11  christos 		    do_got = TRUE;
   3723   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3724   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3725   1.1     skrll 
   3726   1.1     skrll 	    if (do_got)
   3727   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3728  1.11  christos 		if (reloc)
   3729   1.1     skrll 		  {
   3730   1.1     skrll 		    /* Output a dynamic relocation for this GOT entry.
   3731   1.1     skrll 		       In this case it is relative to the base of the
   3732   1.1     skrll 		       object because the symbol index is zero.  */
   3733   1.1     skrll 		    Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3734   1.1     skrll 		    bfd_byte *loc;
   3735  1.11  christos 		    asection *sec = htab->etab.srelgot;
   3736   1.1     skrll 
   3737   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_offset = (off
   3738  1.11  christos 				       + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   3739  1.11  christos 				       + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   3740   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   3741   1.1     skrll 		    outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3742   1.1     skrll 		    loc = sec->contents;
   3743   1.1     skrll 		    loc += sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3744   1.1     skrll 		    bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3745   1.1     skrll 		  }
   3746   1.1     skrll 		else
   3747   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation,
   3748  1.11  christos 			      htab->etab.sgot->contents + off);
   3749   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3750   1.1     skrll 
   3751   1.1     skrll 	    if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3752   1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   3753   1.1     skrll 
   3754   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   3755   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   3756  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   3757  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   3758   1.1     skrll 	  }
   3759   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3760   1.1     skrll 
   3761   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_SEGREL32:
   3762   1.1     skrll 	  /* If this is the first SEGREL relocation, then initialize
   3763   1.1     skrll 	     the segment base values.  */
   3764   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->text_segment_base == (bfd_vma) -1)
   3765   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_map_over_sections (output_bfd, hppa_record_segment_addr, htab);
   3766   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3767   1.1     skrll 
   3768   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL14R:
   3769   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL21L:
   3770   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_PLABEL32:
   3771   1.1     skrll 	  if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   3772   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3773   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_vma off;
   3774   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean do_plt = 0;
   3775   1.1     skrll 	      /* If we have a global symbol with a PLT slot, then
   3776   1.1     skrll 		 redirect this relocation to it.  */
   3777   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh != NULL)
   3778   1.1     skrll 		{
   3779   1.1     skrll 		  off = hh->eh.plt.offset;
   3780   1.7  christos 		  if (! WILL_CALL_FINISH_DYNAMIC_SYMBOL (1,
   3781   1.7  christos 							 bfd_link_pic (info),
   3782   1.1     skrll 							 &hh->eh))
   3783   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3784  1.11  christos 		      /* In a non-shared link, adjust_dynamic_symbol
   3785   1.1     skrll 			 isn't called for symbols forced local.  We
   3786   1.1     skrll 			 need to write out the plt entry here.  */
   3787   1.1     skrll 		      if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3788   1.1     skrll 			off &= ~1;
   3789   1.1     skrll 		      else
   3790   1.1     skrll 			{
   3791   1.1     skrll 			  hh->eh.plt.offset |= 1;
   3792   1.1     skrll 			  do_plt = 1;
   3793   1.1     skrll 			}
   3794   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3795   1.1     skrll 		}
   3796   1.1     skrll 	      else
   3797   1.1     skrll 		{
   3798   1.1     skrll 		  bfd_vma *local_plt_offsets;
   3799   1.1     skrll 
   3800   1.1     skrll 		  if (local_got_offsets == NULL)
   3801   1.1     skrll 		    abort ();
   3802   1.1     skrll 
   3803   1.1     skrll 		  local_plt_offsets = local_got_offsets + symtab_hdr->sh_info;
   3804   1.1     skrll 		  off = local_plt_offsets[r_symndx];
   3805   1.1     skrll 
   3806   1.1     skrll 		  /* As for the local .got entry case, we use the last
   3807   1.1     skrll 		     bit to record whether we've already initialised
   3808   1.1     skrll 		     this local .plt entry.  */
   3809   1.1     skrll 		  if ((off & 1) != 0)
   3810   1.1     skrll 		    off &= ~1;
   3811   1.1     skrll 		  else
   3812   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3813   1.1     skrll 		      local_plt_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   3814   1.1     skrll 		      do_plt = 1;
   3815   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3816   1.1     skrll 		}
   3817   1.1     skrll 
   3818   1.1     skrll 	      if (do_plt)
   3819   1.1     skrll 		{
   3820   1.7  christos 		  if (bfd_link_pic (info))
   3821   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3822   1.1     skrll 		      /* Output a dynamic IPLT relocation for this
   3823   1.1     skrll 			 PLT entry.  */
   3824   1.1     skrll 		      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3825   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_byte *loc;
   3826  1.11  christos 		      asection *s = htab->etab.srelplt;
   3827   1.1     skrll 
   3828   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_offset = (off
   3829  1.11  christos 					 + htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   3830  1.11  christos 					 + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma);
   3831   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   3832   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend = relocation;
   3833   1.1     skrll 		      loc = s->contents;
   3834   1.1     skrll 		      loc += s->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3835   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3836   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3837   1.1     skrll 		  else
   3838   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3839   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3840   1.1     skrll 				  relocation,
   3841  1.11  christos 				  htab->etab.splt->contents + off);
   3842   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   3843  1.11  christos 				  elf_gp (htab->etab.splt->output_section->owner),
   3844  1.11  christos 				  htab->etab.splt->contents + off + 4);
   3845   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3846   1.1     skrll 		}
   3847   1.1     skrll 
   3848   1.1     skrll 	      if (off >= (bfd_vma) -2)
   3849   1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3850   1.1     skrll 
   3851   1.1     skrll 	      /* PLABELs contain function pointers.  Relocation is to
   3852   1.1     skrll 		 the entry for the function in the .plt.  The magic +2
   3853   1.1     skrll 		 offset signals to $$dyncall that the function pointer
   3854   1.1     skrll 		 is in the .plt and thus has a gp pointer too.
   3855   1.1     skrll 		 Exception:  Undefined PLABELs should have a value of
   3856   1.1     skrll 		 zero.  */
   3857   1.1     skrll 	      if (hh == NULL
   3858   1.1     skrll 		  || (hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefweak
   3859   1.1     skrll 		      && hh->eh.root.type != bfd_link_hash_undefined))
   3860   1.1     skrll 		{
   3861   1.1     skrll 		  relocation = (off
   3862  1.11  christos 				+ htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   3863  1.11  christos 				+ htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma
   3864   1.1     skrll 				+ 2);
   3865   1.1     skrll 		}
   3866   1.1     skrll 	      plabel = 1;
   3867   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3868  1.11  christos 	  /* Fall through.  */
   3869   1.1     skrll 
   3870   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17F:
   3871   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR17R:
   3872   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14F:
   3873   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR14R:
   3874   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR21L:
   3875   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14F:
   3876   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL14R:
   3877   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DPREL21L:
   3878   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_DIR32:
   3879   1.1     skrll 	  if ((input_section->flags & SEC_ALLOC) == 0)
   3880   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   3881   1.1     skrll 
   3882  1.11  christos 	  if (bfd_link_pic (info)
   3883  1.11  christos 	      ? ((hh == NULL
   3884  1.11  christos 		  || hh->dyn_relocs != NULL)
   3885  1.11  christos 		 && ((hh != NULL && pc_dynrelocs (hh))
   3886  1.11  christos 		     || IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)))
   3887  1.11  christos 	      : (hh != NULL
   3888  1.11  christos 		 && hh->dyn_relocs != NULL))
   3889   1.1     skrll 	    {
   3890   1.1     skrll 	      Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3891   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_boolean skip;
   3892   1.1     skrll 	      asection *sreloc;
   3893   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_byte *loc;
   3894   1.1     skrll 
   3895   1.1     skrll 	      /* When generating a shared object, these relocations
   3896   1.1     skrll 		 are copied into the output file to be resolved at run
   3897   1.1     skrll 		 time.  */
   3898   1.1     skrll 
   3899   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_addend = rela->r_addend;
   3900   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset =
   3901   1.1     skrll 		_bfd_elf_section_offset (output_bfd, info, input_section,
   3902   1.1     skrll 					 rela->r_offset);
   3903   1.1     skrll 	      skip = (outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -1
   3904   1.1     skrll 		      || outrel.r_offset == (bfd_vma) -2);
   3905   1.1     skrll 	      outrel.r_offset += (input_section->output_offset
   3906   1.1     skrll 				  + input_section->output_section->vma);
   3907   1.7  christos 
   3908   1.1     skrll 	      if (skip)
   3909   1.1     skrll 		{
   3910   1.1     skrll 		  memset (&outrel, 0, sizeof (outrel));
   3911   1.1     skrll 		}
   3912   1.1     skrll 	      else if (hh != NULL
   3913   1.1     skrll 		       && hh->eh.dynindx != -1
   3914   1.1     skrll 		       && (plabel
   3915   1.1     skrll 			   || !IS_ABSOLUTE_RELOC (r_type)
   3916   1.7  christos 			   || !bfd_link_pic (info)
   3917   1.7  christos 			   || !SYMBOLIC_BIND (info, &hh->eh)
   3918   1.1     skrll 			   || !hh->eh.def_regular))
   3919   1.1     skrll 		{
   3920   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (hh->eh.dynindx, r_type);
   3921   1.1     skrll 		}
   3922   1.1     skrll 	      else /* It's a local symbol, or one marked to become local.  */
   3923   1.1     skrll 		{
   3924   1.1     skrll 		  int indx = 0;
   3925   1.1     skrll 
   3926   1.1     skrll 		  /* Add the absolute offset of the symbol.  */
   3927   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_addend += relocation;
   3928   1.1     skrll 
   3929   1.1     skrll 		  /* Global plabels need to be processed by the
   3930   1.1     skrll 		     dynamic linker so that functions have at most one
   3931   1.1     skrll 		     fptr.  For this reason, we need to differentiate
   3932   1.1     skrll 		     between global and local plabels, which we do by
   3933   1.1     skrll 		     providing the function symbol for a global plabel
   3934   1.1     skrll 		     reloc, and no symbol for local plabels.  */
   3935   1.1     skrll 		  if (! plabel
   3936   1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec != NULL
   3937   1.1     skrll 		      && sym_sec->output_section != NULL
   3938   1.1     skrll 		      && ! bfd_is_abs_section (sym_sec))
   3939   1.1     skrll 		    {
   3940   1.1     skrll 		      asection *osec;
   3941   1.1     skrll 
   3942   1.1     skrll 		      osec = sym_sec->output_section;
   3943   1.1     skrll 		      indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   3944   1.1     skrll 		      if (indx == 0)
   3945   1.1     skrll 			{
   3946   1.1     skrll 			  osec = htab->etab.text_index_section;
   3947   1.1     skrll 			  indx = elf_section_data (osec)->dynindx;
   3948   1.1     skrll 			}
   3949   1.1     skrll 		      BFD_ASSERT (indx != 0);
   3950   1.1     skrll 
   3951   1.1     skrll 		      /* We are turning this relocation into one
   3952   1.1     skrll 			 against a section symbol, so subtract out the
   3953   1.1     skrll 			 output section's address but not the offset
   3954   1.1     skrll 			 of the input section in the output section.  */
   3955   1.1     skrll 		      outrel.r_addend -= osec->vma;
   3956   1.1     skrll 		    }
   3957   1.1     skrll 
   3958   1.1     skrll 		  outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, r_type);
   3959   1.1     skrll 		}
   3960   1.1     skrll 	      sreloc = elf_section_data (input_section)->sreloc;
   3961   1.1     skrll 	      if (sreloc == NULL)
   3962   1.1     skrll 		abort ();
   3963   1.1     skrll 
   3964   1.1     skrll 	      loc = sreloc->contents;
   3965   1.1     skrll 	      loc += sreloc->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3966   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3967   1.1     skrll 	    }
   3968   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   3969   1.7  christos 
   3970   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM21L:
   3971   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDM14R:
   3972   1.1     skrll 	  {
   3973   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   3974   1.7  christos 
   3975   1.1     skrll 	    off = htab->tls_ldm_got.offset;
   3976   1.1     skrll 	    if (off & 1)
   3977   1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   3978   1.1     skrll 	    else
   3979   1.1     skrll 	      {
   3980   1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   3981   1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc;
   3982   1.1     skrll 
   3983   1.7  christos 		outrel.r_offset = (off
   3984  1.11  christos 				   + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma
   3985  1.11  christos 				   + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset);
   3986   1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_addend = 0;
   3987   1.1     skrll 		outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   3988  1.11  christos 		loc = htab->etab.srelgot->contents;
   3989  1.11  christos 		loc += htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   3990   1.1     skrll 
   3991   1.1     skrll 		bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   3992   1.1     skrll 		htab->tls_ldm_got.offset |= 1;
   3993   1.1     skrll 	      }
   3994   1.1     skrll 
   3995   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   3996   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   3997  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   3998  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   3999   1.1     skrll 
   4000   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4001   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4002   1.1     skrll 
   4003   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO21L:
   4004   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LDO14R:
   4005   1.1     skrll 	  relocation -= dtpoff_base (info);
   4006   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4007   1.1     skrll 
   4008   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L:
   4009   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R:
   4010   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE21L:
   4011   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_IE14R:
   4012   1.1     skrll 	  {
   4013   1.1     skrll 	    bfd_vma off;
   4014   1.1     skrll 	    int indx;
   4015   1.1     skrll 	    char tls_type;
   4016   1.1     skrll 
   4017   1.1     skrll 	    indx = 0;
   4018   1.1     skrll 	    if (hh != NULL)
   4019   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4020  1.11  christos 		if (!htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created
   4021  1.11  christos 		    || hh->eh.dynindx == -1
   4022  1.11  christos 		    || SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)
   4023  1.11  christos 		    || UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, &hh->eh))
   4024  1.11  christos 		  /* This is actually a static link, or it is a
   4025  1.11  christos 		     -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   4026  1.11  christos 		     locally, or the symbol was forced to be local
   4027  1.11  christos 		     because of a version file.  */
   4028  1.11  christos 		  ;
   4029  1.11  christos 		else
   4030  1.11  christos 		  indx = hh->eh.dynindx;
   4031   1.1     skrll 		off = hh->eh.got.offset;
   4032   1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hh->tls_type;
   4033   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4034   1.1     skrll 	    else
   4035   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4036   1.1     skrll 		off = local_got_offsets[r_symndx];
   4037   1.1     skrll 		tls_type = hppa_elf_local_got_tls_type (input_bfd)[r_symndx];
   4038   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4039   1.1     skrll 
   4040   1.1     skrll 	    if (tls_type == GOT_UNKNOWN)
   4041   1.1     skrll 	      abort ();
   4042   1.1     skrll 
   4043   1.1     skrll 	    if ((off & 1) != 0)
   4044   1.1     skrll 	      off &= ~1;
   4045   1.1     skrll 	    else
   4046   1.1     skrll 	      {
   4047   1.1     skrll 		bfd_boolean need_relocs = FALSE;
   4048   1.1     skrll 		Elf_Internal_Rela outrel;
   4049   1.1     skrll 		bfd_byte *loc = NULL;
   4050   1.1     skrll 		int cur_off = off;
   4051   1.1     skrll 
   4052  1.11  christos 		/* The GOT entries have not been initialized yet.  Do it
   4053  1.11  christos 		   now, and emit any relocations.  If both an IE GOT and a
   4054  1.11  christos 		   GD GOT are necessary, we emit the GD first.  */
   4055  1.11  christos 
   4056  1.11  christos 		if (indx != 0
   4057  1.12  christos 		    || (bfd_link_dll (info)
   4058  1.11  christos 			&& (hh == NULL
   4059  1.11  christos 			    || !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, &hh->eh))))
   4060   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4061   1.1     skrll 		    need_relocs = TRUE;
   4062  1.11  christos 		    loc = htab->etab.srelgot->contents;
   4063  1.11  christos 		    loc += (htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count
   4064  1.11  christos 			    * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela));
   4065   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4066   1.1     skrll 
   4067   1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   4068   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4069   1.1     skrll 		    if (need_relocs)
   4070   1.1     skrll 		      {
   4071  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_offset
   4072  1.11  christos 			  = (cur_off
   4073  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma
   4074  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset);
   4075  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_info
   4076  1.11  christos 			  = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32);
   4077   1.1     skrll 			outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4078   1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4079  1.11  christos 			htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4080   1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4081  1.12  christos 			bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   4082  1.12  christos 				    htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4083  1.12  christos 		      }
   4084  1.12  christos 		    else
   4085  1.12  christos 		      /* If we are not emitting relocations for a
   4086  1.12  christos 			 general dynamic reference, then we must be in a
   4087  1.12  christos 			 static link or an executable link with the
   4088  1.12  christos 			 symbol binding locally.  Mark it as belonging
   4089  1.12  christos 			 to module 1, the executable.  */
   4090  1.12  christos 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 1,
   4091  1.12  christos 				  htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4092  1.12  christos 
   4093  1.12  christos 		    if (indx != 0)
   4094  1.12  christos 		      {
   4095  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_info
   4096  1.11  christos 			  = ELF32_R_INFO (indx, R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32);
   4097  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_offset += 4;
   4098  1.11  christos 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4099  1.11  christos 			htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4100  1.11  christos 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4101  1.11  christos 			bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   4102  1.11  christos 				    htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4103   1.1     skrll 		      }
   4104   1.1     skrll 		    else
   4105  1.12  christos 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, relocation - dtpoff_base (info),
   4106  1.12  christos 				  htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off + 4);
   4107   1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 8;
   4108   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4109   1.1     skrll 
   4110   1.1     skrll 		if (tls_type & GOT_TLS_IE)
   4111   1.1     skrll 		  {
   4112  1.11  christos 		    if (need_relocs
   4113  1.11  christos 			&& !(bfd_link_executable (info)
   4114  1.11  christos 			     && SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, &hh->eh)))
   4115   1.1     skrll 		      {
   4116  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_offset
   4117  1.11  christos 			  = (cur_off
   4118  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma
   4119  1.11  christos 			     + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset);
   4120  1.11  christos 			outrel.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (indx,
   4121  1.11  christos 						      R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32);
   4122   1.1     skrll 			if (indx == 0)
   4123   1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = relocation - dtpoff_base (info);
   4124   1.1     skrll 			else
   4125   1.1     skrll 			  outrel.r_addend = 0;
   4126   1.1     skrll 			bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &outrel, loc);
   4127  1.11  christos 			htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++;
   4128   1.1     skrll 			loc += sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4129   1.1     skrll 		      }
   4130   1.1     skrll 		    else
   4131   1.1     skrll 		      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, tpoff (info, relocation),
   4132  1.11  christos 				  htab->etab.sgot->contents + cur_off);
   4133   1.1     skrll 		    cur_off += 4;
   4134   1.1     skrll 		  }
   4135   1.1     skrll 
   4136   1.1     skrll 		if (hh != NULL)
   4137   1.1     skrll 		  hh->eh.got.offset |= 1;
   4138   1.1     skrll 		else
   4139   1.1     skrll 		  local_got_offsets[r_symndx] |= 1;
   4140   1.1     skrll 	      }
   4141   1.1     skrll 
   4142  1.11  christos 	    if ((tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0
   4143  1.11  christos 		&& (tls_type & (GOT_TLS_GD | GOT_TLS_LDM | GOT_TLS_IE)) != 0)
   4144  1.11  christos 	      {
   4145  1.11  christos 		if (hh != NULL)
   4146  1.11  christos 		  _bfd_error_handler (_("%s has both normal and TLS relocs"),
   4147  1.11  christos 				      hh_name (hh));
   4148  1.11  christos 		else
   4149  1.11  christos 		  {
   4150  1.11  christos 		    Elf_Internal_Sym *isym
   4151  1.11  christos 		      = bfd_sym_from_r_symndx (&htab->sym_cache,
   4152  1.11  christos 					       input_bfd, r_symndx);
   4153  1.11  christos 		    if (isym == NULL)
   4154  1.11  christos 		      return FALSE;
   4155  1.11  christos 		    sym_name
   4156  1.11  christos 		      = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   4157  1.11  christos 							 symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   4158  1.11  christos 							 isym->st_name);
   4159  1.11  christos 		    if (sym_name == NULL)
   4160  1.11  christos 		      return FALSE;
   4161  1.11  christos 		    if (*sym_name == '\0')
   4162  1.13  christos 		      sym_name = bfd_section_name (sym_sec);
   4163  1.11  christos 		    _bfd_error_handler
   4164  1.12  christos 		      (_("%pB:%s has both normal and TLS relocs"),
   4165  1.11  christos 		       input_bfd, sym_name);
   4166  1.11  christos 		  }
   4167  1.11  christos 		bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   4168  1.11  christos 		return FALSE;
   4169  1.11  christos 	      }
   4170  1.11  christos 
   4171   1.1     skrll 	    if ((tls_type & GOT_TLS_GD)
   4172  1.11  christos 		&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD21L
   4173  1.11  christos 		&& r_type != R_PARISC_TLS_GD14R)
   4174   1.1     skrll 	      off += 2 * GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4175   1.1     skrll 
   4176   1.1     skrll 	    /* Add the base of the GOT to the relocation value.  */
   4177   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = (off
   4178  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   4179  1.11  christos 			  + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   4180   1.1     skrll 
   4181   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4182   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4183   1.1     skrll 
   4184   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE21L:
   4185   1.1     skrll 	case R_PARISC_TLS_LE14R:
   4186   1.1     skrll 	  {
   4187   1.1     skrll 	    relocation = tpoff (info, relocation);
   4188   1.1     skrll 	    break;
   4189   1.1     skrll 	  }
   4190   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4191   1.1     skrll 
   4192   1.1     skrll 	default:
   4193   1.1     skrll 	  break;
   4194   1.1     skrll 	}
   4195   1.1     skrll 
   4196   1.1     skrll       rstatus = final_link_relocate (input_section, contents, rela, relocation,
   4197   1.1     skrll 			       htab, sym_sec, hh, info);
   4198   1.1     skrll 
   4199   1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_ok)
   4200   1.1     skrll 	continue;
   4201   1.1     skrll 
   4202   1.1     skrll       if (hh != NULL)
   4203   1.1     skrll 	sym_name = hh_name (hh);
   4204   1.1     skrll       else
   4205   1.1     skrll 	{
   4206   1.1     skrll 	  sym_name = bfd_elf_string_from_elf_section (input_bfd,
   4207   1.1     skrll 						      symtab_hdr->sh_link,
   4208   1.1     skrll 						      sym->st_name);
   4209   1.1     skrll 	  if (sym_name == NULL)
   4210   1.1     skrll 	    return FALSE;
   4211   1.1     skrll 	  if (*sym_name == '\0')
   4212  1.13  christos 	    sym_name = bfd_section_name (sym_sec);
   4213   1.1     skrll 	}
   4214   1.1     skrll 
   4215   1.1     skrll       howto = elf_hppa_howto_table + r_type;
   4216   1.1     skrll 
   4217   1.1     skrll       if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_undefined || rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported)
   4218   1.1     skrll 	{
   4219   1.1     skrll 	  if (rstatus == bfd_reloc_notsupported || !warned_undef)
   4220   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4221  1.11  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   4222  1.11  christos 		/* xgettext:c-format */
   4223  1.12  christos 		(_("%pB(%pA+%#" PRIx64 "): cannot handle %s for %s"),
   4224   1.1     skrll 		 input_bfd,
   4225   1.1     skrll 		 input_section,
   4226  1.12  christos 		 (uint64_t) rela->r_offset,
   4227   1.1     skrll 		 howto->name,
   4228   1.1     skrll 		 sym_name);
   4229   1.1     skrll 	      bfd_set_error (bfd_error_bad_value);
   4230   1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   4231   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4232   1.1     skrll 	}
   4233   1.1     skrll       else
   4234  1.10  christos 	(*info->callbacks->reloc_overflow)
   4235  1.10  christos 	  (info, (hh ? &hh->eh.root : NULL), sym_name, howto->name,
   4236  1.10  christos 	   (bfd_vma) 0, input_bfd, input_section, rela->r_offset);
   4237   1.1     skrll     }
   4238   1.1     skrll 
   4239   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4240   1.1     skrll }
   4241   1.1     skrll 
   4242   1.1     skrll /* Finish up dynamic symbol handling.  We set the contents of various
   4243   1.1     skrll    dynamic sections here.  */
   4244   1.1     skrll 
   4245   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   4246   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol (bfd *output_bfd,
   4247   1.1     skrll 				  struct bfd_link_info *info,
   4248   1.1     skrll 				  struct elf_link_hash_entry *eh,
   4249   1.1     skrll 				  Elf_Internal_Sym *sym)
   4250   1.1     skrll {
   4251   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4252   1.1     skrll   Elf_Internal_Rela rela;
   4253   1.1     skrll   bfd_byte *loc;
   4254   1.1     skrll 
   4255   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4256   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4257   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   4258   1.1     skrll 
   4259   1.1     skrll   if (eh->plt.offset != (bfd_vma) -1)
   4260   1.1     skrll     {
   4261   1.1     skrll       bfd_vma value;
   4262   1.1     skrll 
   4263   1.1     skrll       if (eh->plt.offset & 1)
   4264   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4265   1.1     skrll 
   4266   1.1     skrll       /* This symbol has an entry in the procedure linkage table.  Set
   4267   1.1     skrll 	 it up.
   4268   1.1     skrll 
   4269   1.1     skrll 	 The format of a plt entry is
   4270   1.1     skrll 	 <funcaddr>
   4271   1.1     skrll 	 <__gp>
   4272   1.1     skrll       */
   4273   1.1     skrll       value = 0;
   4274   1.1     skrll       if (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4275   1.1     skrll 	  || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)
   4276   1.1     skrll 	{
   4277   1.1     skrll 	  value = eh->root.u.def.value;
   4278   1.1     skrll 	  if (eh->root.u.def.section->output_section != NULL)
   4279   1.1     skrll 	    value += (eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4280   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4281   1.1     skrll 	}
   4282   1.1     skrll 
   4283   1.1     skrll       /* Create a dynamic IPLT relocation for this entry.  */
   4284   1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->plt.offset
   4285  1.11  christos 		      + htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   4286  1.11  christos 		      + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma);
   4287   1.1     skrll       if (eh->dynindx != -1)
   4288   1.1     skrll 	{
   4289   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4290   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = 0;
   4291   1.1     skrll 	}
   4292   1.1     skrll       else
   4293   1.1     skrll 	{
   4294   1.1     skrll 	  /* This symbol has been marked to become local, and is
   4295   1.1     skrll 	     used by a plabel so must be kept in the .plt.  */
   4296   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_IPLT);
   4297   1.1     skrll 	  rela.r_addend = value;
   4298   1.1     skrll 	}
   4299   1.1     skrll 
   4300  1.11  christos       loc = htab->etab.srelplt->contents;
   4301  1.11  christos       loc += htab->etab.srelplt->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4302  1.11  christos       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (htab->etab.splt->output_section->owner, &rela, loc);
   4303   1.1     skrll 
   4304   1.1     skrll       if (!eh->def_regular)
   4305   1.1     skrll 	{
   4306   1.1     skrll 	  /* Mark the symbol as undefined, rather than as defined in
   4307   1.1     skrll 	     the .plt section.  Leave the value alone.  */
   4308   1.1     skrll 	  sym->st_shndx = SHN_UNDEF;
   4309   1.1     skrll 	}
   4310   1.1     skrll     }
   4311   1.1     skrll 
   4312   1.1     skrll   if (eh->got.offset != (bfd_vma) -1
   4313  1.11  christos       && (hppa_elf_hash_entry (eh)->tls_type & GOT_NORMAL) != 0
   4314  1.11  christos       && !UNDEFWEAK_NO_DYNAMIC_RELOC (info, eh))
   4315   1.1     skrll     {
   4316  1.11  christos       bfd_boolean is_dyn = (eh->dynindx != -1
   4317  1.11  christos 			    && !SYMBOL_REFERENCES_LOCAL (info, eh));
   4318   1.1     skrll 
   4319  1.11  christos       if (is_dyn || bfd_link_pic (info))
   4320   1.1     skrll 	{
   4321  1.11  christos 	  /* This symbol has an entry in the global offset table.  Set
   4322  1.11  christos 	     it up.  */
   4323  1.11  christos 
   4324  1.11  christos 	  rela.r_offset = ((eh->got.offset &~ (bfd_vma) 1)
   4325  1.11  christos 			   + htab->etab.sgot->output_offset
   4326  1.11  christos 			   + htab->etab.sgot->output_section->vma);
   4327  1.11  christos 
   4328  1.11  christos 	  /* If this is a -Bsymbolic link and the symbol is defined
   4329  1.11  christos 	     locally or was forced to be local because of a version
   4330  1.11  christos 	     file, we just want to emit a RELATIVE reloc.  The entry
   4331  1.11  christos 	     in the global offset table will already have been
   4332  1.11  christos 	     initialized in the relocate_section function.  */
   4333  1.11  christos 	  if (!is_dyn)
   4334  1.11  christos 	    {
   4335  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (0, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4336  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_addend = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4337  1.11  christos 			       + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4338  1.11  christos 			       + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4339  1.11  christos 	    }
   4340  1.11  christos 	  else
   4341  1.11  christos 	    {
   4342  1.11  christos 	      if ((eh->got.offset & 1) != 0)
   4343  1.11  christos 		abort ();
   4344  1.11  christos 
   4345  1.11  christos 	      bfd_put_32 (output_bfd, 0,
   4346  1.11  christos 			  htab->etab.sgot->contents + (eh->got.offset & ~1));
   4347  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_DIR32);
   4348  1.11  christos 	      rela.r_addend = 0;
   4349  1.11  christos 	    }
   4350   1.1     skrll 
   4351  1.11  christos 	  loc = htab->etab.srelgot->contents;
   4352  1.11  christos 	  loc += (htab->etab.srelgot->reloc_count++
   4353  1.11  christos 		  * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela));
   4354  1.11  christos 	  bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4355   1.1     skrll 	}
   4356   1.1     skrll     }
   4357   1.1     skrll 
   4358   1.1     skrll   if (eh->needs_copy)
   4359   1.1     skrll     {
   4360   1.1     skrll       asection *sec;
   4361   1.1     skrll 
   4362   1.1     skrll       /* This symbol needs a copy reloc.  Set it up.  */
   4363   1.1     skrll 
   4364   1.1     skrll       if (! (eh->dynindx != -1
   4365   1.1     skrll 	     && (eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defined
   4366   1.1     skrll 		 || eh->root.type == bfd_link_hash_defweak)))
   4367   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4368   1.1     skrll 
   4369   1.1     skrll       rela.r_offset = (eh->root.u.def.value
   4370   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_offset
   4371   1.1     skrll 		      + eh->root.u.def.section->output_section->vma);
   4372   1.1     skrll       rela.r_addend = 0;
   4373   1.1     skrll       rela.r_info = ELF32_R_INFO (eh->dynindx, R_PARISC_COPY);
   4374  1.11  christos       if (eh->root.u.def.section == htab->etab.sdynrelro)
   4375  1.11  christos 	sec = htab->etab.sreldynrelro;
   4376  1.11  christos       else
   4377  1.11  christos 	sec = htab->etab.srelbss;
   4378   1.1     skrll       loc = sec->contents + sec->reloc_count++ * sizeof (Elf32_External_Rela);
   4379   1.1     skrll       bfd_elf32_swap_reloca_out (output_bfd, &rela, loc);
   4380   1.1     skrll     }
   4381   1.1     skrll 
   4382   1.1     skrll   /* Mark _DYNAMIC and _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ as absolute.  */
   4383   1.7  christos   if (eh == htab->etab.hdynamic || eh == htab->etab.hgot)
   4384   1.1     skrll     {
   4385   1.1     skrll       sym->st_shndx = SHN_ABS;
   4386   1.1     skrll     }
   4387   1.1     skrll 
   4388   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4389   1.1     skrll }
   4390   1.1     skrll 
   4391   1.1     skrll /* Used to decide how to sort relocs in an optimal manner for the
   4392   1.1     skrll    dynamic linker, before writing them out.  */
   4393   1.1     skrll 
   4394   1.1     skrll static enum elf_reloc_type_class
   4395   1.7  christos elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class (const struct bfd_link_info *info ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   4396   1.7  christos 			     const asection *rel_sec ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED,
   4397   1.7  christos 			     const Elf_Internal_Rela *rela)
   4398   1.1     skrll {
   4399   1.1     skrll   /* Handle TLS relocs first; we don't want them to be marked
   4400   1.3  christos      relative by the "if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)"
   4401   1.1     skrll      check below.  */
   4402   1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4403   1.1     skrll     {
   4404   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPMOD32:
   4405   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_DTPOFF32:
   4406   1.1     skrll       case R_PARISC_TLS_TPREL32:
   4407  1.11  christos 	return reloc_class_normal;
   4408   1.1     skrll     }
   4409   1.1     skrll 
   4410   1.3  christos   if (ELF32_R_SYM (rela->r_info) == STN_UNDEF)
   4411   1.1     skrll     return reloc_class_relative;
   4412   1.1     skrll 
   4413   1.1     skrll   switch ((int) ELF32_R_TYPE (rela->r_info))
   4414   1.1     skrll     {
   4415   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_IPLT:
   4416   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_plt;
   4417   1.1     skrll     case R_PARISC_COPY:
   4418   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_copy;
   4419   1.1     skrll     default:
   4420   1.1     skrll       return reloc_class_normal;
   4421   1.1     skrll     }
   4422   1.1     skrll }
   4423   1.1     skrll 
   4424   1.1     skrll /* Finish up the dynamic sections.  */
   4425   1.1     skrll 
   4426   1.1     skrll static bfd_boolean
   4427   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections (bfd *output_bfd,
   4428   1.1     skrll 				    struct bfd_link_info *info)
   4429   1.1     skrll {
   4430   1.1     skrll   bfd *dynobj;
   4431   1.1     skrll   struct elf32_hppa_link_hash_table *htab;
   4432   1.1     skrll   asection *sdyn;
   4433   1.6  christos   asection * sgot;
   4434   1.1     skrll 
   4435   1.1     skrll   htab = hppa_link_hash_table (info);
   4436   1.3  christos   if (htab == NULL)
   4437   1.3  christos     return FALSE;
   4438   1.3  christos 
   4439   1.1     skrll   dynobj = htab->etab.dynobj;
   4440   1.1     skrll 
   4441  1.11  christos   sgot = htab->etab.sgot;
   4442   1.6  christos   /* A broken linker script might have discarded the dynamic sections.
   4443   1.6  christos      Catch this here so that we do not seg-fault later on.  */
   4444   1.6  christos   if (sgot != NULL && bfd_is_abs_section (sgot->output_section))
   4445   1.6  christos     return FALSE;
   4446   1.6  christos 
   4447   1.6  christos   sdyn = bfd_get_linker_section (dynobj, ".dynamic");
   4448   1.1     skrll 
   4449   1.1     skrll   if (htab->etab.dynamic_sections_created)
   4450   1.1     skrll     {
   4451   1.1     skrll       Elf32_External_Dyn *dyncon, *dynconend;
   4452   1.1     skrll 
   4453   1.1     skrll       if (sdyn == NULL)
   4454   1.1     skrll 	abort ();
   4455   1.1     skrll 
   4456   1.1     skrll       dyncon = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) sdyn->contents;
   4457   1.1     skrll       dynconend = (Elf32_External_Dyn *) (sdyn->contents + sdyn->size);
   4458   1.1     skrll       for (; dyncon < dynconend; dyncon++)
   4459   1.1     skrll 	{
   4460   1.1     skrll 	  Elf_Internal_Dyn dyn;
   4461   1.1     skrll 	  asection *s;
   4462   1.1     skrll 
   4463   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_in (dynobj, dyncon, &dyn);
   4464   1.1     skrll 
   4465   1.1     skrll 	  switch (dyn.d_tag)
   4466   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4467   1.1     skrll 	    default:
   4468   1.1     skrll 	      continue;
   4469   1.1     skrll 
   4470   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTGOT:
   4471   1.1     skrll 	      /* Use PLTGOT to set the GOT register.  */
   4472   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = elf_gp (output_bfd);
   4473   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4474   1.1     skrll 
   4475   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_JMPREL:
   4476  1.11  christos 	      s = htab->etab.srelplt;
   4477   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_ptr = s->output_section->vma + s->output_offset;
   4478   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4479   1.1     skrll 
   4480   1.1     skrll 	    case DT_PLTRELSZ:
   4481  1.11  christos 	      s = htab->etab.srelplt;
   4482   1.1     skrll 	      dyn.d_un.d_val = s->size;
   4483   1.1     skrll 	      break;
   4484   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4485   1.1     skrll 
   4486   1.1     skrll 	  bfd_elf32_swap_dyn_out (output_bfd, &dyn, dyncon);
   4487   1.1     skrll 	}
   4488   1.1     skrll     }
   4489   1.1     skrll 
   4490   1.6  christos   if (sgot != NULL && sgot->size != 0)
   4491   1.1     skrll     {
   4492   1.1     skrll       /* Fill in the first entry in the global offset table.
   4493   1.1     skrll 	 We use it to point to our dynamic section, if we have one.  */
   4494   1.1     skrll       bfd_put_32 (output_bfd,
   4495   1.1     skrll 		  sdyn ? sdyn->output_section->vma + sdyn->output_offset : 0,
   4496   1.6  christos 		  sgot->contents);
   4497   1.1     skrll 
   4498   1.1     skrll       /* The second entry is reserved for use by the dynamic linker.  */
   4499   1.6  christos       memset (sgot->contents + GOT_ENTRY_SIZE, 0, GOT_ENTRY_SIZE);
   4500   1.1     skrll 
   4501   1.1     skrll       /* Set .got entry size.  */
   4502   1.6  christos       elf_section_data (sgot->output_section)
   4503   1.1     skrll 	->this_hdr.sh_entsize = GOT_ENTRY_SIZE;
   4504   1.1     skrll     }
   4505   1.1     skrll 
   4506  1.11  christos   if (htab->etab.splt != NULL && htab->etab.splt->size != 0)
   4507   1.1     skrll     {
   4508   1.7  christos       /* Set plt entry size to 0 instead of PLT_ENTRY_SIZE, since we add the
   4509   1.7  christos 	 plt stubs and as such the section does not hold a table of fixed-size
   4510   1.7  christos 	 entries.  */
   4511  1.11  christos       elf_section_data (htab->etab.splt->output_section)->this_hdr.sh_entsize = 0;
   4512   1.1     skrll 
   4513   1.1     skrll       if (htab->need_plt_stub)
   4514   1.1     skrll 	{
   4515   1.1     skrll 	  /* Set up the .plt stub.  */
   4516  1.11  christos 	  memcpy (htab->etab.splt->contents
   4517  1.11  christos 		  + htab->etab.splt->size - sizeof (plt_stub),
   4518   1.1     skrll 		  plt_stub, sizeof (plt_stub));
   4519   1.1     skrll 
   4520  1.11  christos 	  if ((htab->etab.splt->output_offset
   4521  1.11  christos 	       + htab->etab.splt->output_section->vma
   4522  1.11  christos 	       + htab->etab.splt->size)
   4523   1.6  christos 	      != (sgot->output_offset
   4524   1.6  christos 		  + sgot->output_section->vma))
   4525   1.1     skrll 	    {
   4526  1.11  christos 	      _bfd_error_handler
   4527   1.1     skrll 		(_(".got section not immediately after .plt section"));
   4528   1.1     skrll 	      return FALSE;
   4529   1.1     skrll 	    }
   4530   1.1     skrll 	}
   4531   1.1     skrll     }
   4532   1.1     skrll 
   4533   1.1     skrll   return TRUE;
   4534   1.1     skrll }
   4535   1.1     skrll 
   4536   1.1     skrll /* Called when writing out an object file to decide the type of a
   4537   1.1     skrll    symbol.  */
   4538   1.1     skrll static int
   4539   1.1     skrll elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type (Elf_Internal_Sym *elf_sym, int type)
   4540   1.1     skrll {
   4541   1.1     skrll   if (ELF_ST_TYPE (elf_sym->st_info) == STT_PARISC_MILLI)
   4542   1.1     skrll     return STT_PARISC_MILLI;
   4543   1.1     skrll   else
   4544   1.1     skrll     return type;
   4545   1.1     skrll }
   4546   1.1     skrll 
   4547   1.1     skrll /* Misc BFD support code.  */
   4548   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_is_local_label_name    elf_hppa_is_local_label_name
   4549   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_type_lookup	     elf_hppa_reloc_type_lookup
   4550   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_reloc_name_lookup      elf_hppa_reloc_name_lookup
   4551   1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto
   4552   1.1     skrll #define elf_info_to_howto_rel		     elf_hppa_info_to_howto_rel
   4553   1.1     skrll 
   4554   1.1     skrll /* Stuff for the BFD linker.  */
   4555   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_final_link	     elf32_hppa_final_link
   4556   1.1     skrll #define bfd_elf32_bfd_link_hash_table_create elf32_hppa_link_hash_table_create
   4557   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_adjust_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_adjust_dynamic_symbol
   4558   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_copy_indirect_symbol     elf32_hppa_copy_indirect_symbol
   4559   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_check_relocs	     elf32_hppa_check_relocs
   4560  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_relocs_compatible	     _bfd_elf_relocs_compatible
   4561   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_create_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_create_dynamic_sections
   4562   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_fake_sections	     elf_hppa_fake_sections
   4563   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_relocate_section	     elf32_hppa_relocate_section
   4564   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_hide_symbol		     elf32_hppa_hide_symbol
   4565   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_symbol    elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_symbol
   4566   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_finish_dynamic_sections  elf32_hppa_finish_dynamic_sections
   4567   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_size_dynamic_sections    elf32_hppa_size_dynamic_sections
   4568   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_init_index_section	     _bfd_elf_init_1_index_section
   4569   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_gc_mark_hook	     elf32_hppa_gc_mark_hook
   4570   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_prstatus	     elf32_hppa_grok_prstatus
   4571   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_grok_psinfo		     elf32_hppa_grok_psinfo
   4572   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_object_p		     elf32_hppa_object_p
   4573   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_final_write_processing   elf_hppa_final_write_processing
   4574   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_get_symbol_type	     elf32_hppa_elf_get_symbol_type
   4575   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_reloc_type_class	     elf32_hppa_reloc_type_class
   4576   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_action_discarded	     elf_hppa_action_discarded
   4577   1.1     skrll 
   4578   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_gc_sections	     1
   4579   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_can_refcount	     1
   4580   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_alignment	     2
   4581   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_got_plt	     0
   4582   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_plt_readonly	     0
   4583   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_want_plt_sym	     0
   4584   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_got_header_size	     8
   4585  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_want_dynrelro	     1
   4586   1.1     skrll #define elf_backend_rela_normal		     1
   4587  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_dtrel_excludes_plt	     1
   4588  1.11  christos #define elf_backend_no_page_alias	     1
   4589   1.1     skrll 
   4590   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_vec
   4591   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa"
   4592   1.1     skrll #define ELF_ARCH		bfd_arch_hppa
   4593   1.3  christos #define ELF_TARGET_ID		HPPA32_ELF_DATA
   4594   1.1     skrll #define ELF_MACHINE_CODE	EM_PARISC
   4595   1.1     skrll #define ELF_MAXPAGESIZE		0x1000
   4596   1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_HPUX
   4597   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_hpux_bed
   4598   1.1     skrll 
   4599   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4600   1.1     skrll 
   4601   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4602   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_linux_vec
   4603   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4604   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-linux"
   4605   1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4606   1.6  christos #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_GNU
   4607   1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4608   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_linux_bed
   4609   1.1     skrll 
   4610   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4611   1.1     skrll 
   4612   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_SYM
   4613   1.7  christos #define TARGET_BIG_SYM		hppa_elf32_nbsd_vec
   4614   1.1     skrll #undef TARGET_BIG_NAME
   4615   1.1     skrll #define TARGET_BIG_NAME		"elf32-hppa-netbsd"
   4616   1.1     skrll #undef ELF_OSABI
   4617   1.1     skrll #define ELF_OSABI		ELFOSABI_NETBSD
   4618   1.1     skrll #undef elf32_bed
   4619   1.1     skrll #define elf32_bed		elf32_hppa_netbsd_bed
   4620   1.1     skrll 
   4621   1.1     skrll #include "elf32-target.h"
   4622